JP7128785B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko machines and slot machines, which are examples of game machines, include electronic parts such as display means such as liquid crystal displays and light emitting means such as LEDs (light emitting diodes).

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A game machine capable of playing,
an electronic component provided so as to be visible to the player;
a light-transmitting member that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided so that the electronic component can be visually recognized;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
with
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part ,
The guide passage-forming portion includes a specific restricting portion that restricts movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage-forming portion to the dispensing portion.
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
moreover,
movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R);
A specific effect (for example, a movable body motion effect A or a movable body motion effect B) for announcing the effect result by moving the movable body, and repeatedly moving the movable body before the specific effect is executed. Effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a movable body action suggestive effect A or a movable body action suggestive effect B) that suggests that the specific effect will be executed by 40-19 for executing the effect processing during variable display);
with
The production executing means is
While the effect image for the movable body is not displayed when the suggestive effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed when the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 to 40-35). Thus, while the movable body motion suggestive effect B is being executed, the image display device 5 does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B. is displayed),
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 and 40-34, during the reach effect of super reach β1 If so, ally character B and enemy character A are displayed, and ally character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner. (the part where the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed in an enlarged manner),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, an effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 and 40-34, the image display device 5 where the effect image 109SG005X is displayed),
The specific images include a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and an advantageous state is obtained when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 40-9, the variable display of super reach β2, in which friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed during the ready-to-win effect, is controlled by friendly character B and A portion where the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of super reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms, whereas the update period of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. Moreover, since the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the performance action of the movable body more conspicuous, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. 2003-96050, a game machine has a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall and a game media payout device. a payout device (payout unit) capable of performing the above-mentioned operation, and a guide passage forming unit that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage unit to the payout unit. There were things attached to the game frame by. However, in such a game machine, a screw member for attaching the storage portion or the guide passage forming portion to the game frame or a screw member attached to the inside of the game island may come off, and the storage portion or the guide passage may become dislodged. If the game medium is dropped into the forming portion, the screw member is mixed with the game medium into the payout device, and the game medium cannot be paid out normally, or the payout device breaks down, or the screw member is thrown into the game medium together with the game medium. In view of this problem, there is a demand for a game machine capable of preventing the screw member from entering the payout portion.

The game machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
with
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 30 and 32),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (FIG. 19). , Figures 20 and 35)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing drawing commands for effects related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a screen display related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an execution example of image processing related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an image display example related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect and the drawing process pattern concerning characteristic parts 01AK and 02AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of drawing processing patterns related to characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution example based on characteristic part 01AK and 02AK. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic portion 75SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. It is a front view showing the game board of the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3; It is a front view which shows a light-guide plate apparatus. (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 1st production|presentation unit from diagonally front. (A) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (C) is an E- of FIG. 10-7 (A) It is E sectional drawing. (A) is a front view showing a base member, (B) is a front view showing an LED board, and (C) is a front view showing a cover member. (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-11B is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B); (A) is a front view showing a variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A). (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. It is a figure for demonstrating a similar color. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. (A) is a cross-sectional view along GG in FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view along HH in FIG. 10-17(A). (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED substrate, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit. (A) is a front view showing a third effect unit and a fourth effect unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20; It is explanatory drawing which shows the visual recognition condition of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 3rd production|presentation unit and a 4th production|presentation unit. It is a figure which shows the presentation mode when the 3rd presentation unit and the 4th presentation unit light-emit. (A) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) is a schematic front view showing a state where the third effect unit is located at the effect position. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 18A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 18A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 18A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 29. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 29, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 29, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 29; FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 29; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001),
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a translucent member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a member having translucency and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts less conspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
Predetermined electronic components (for example, first starter switch 22A, second starter switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) that are invisible or invisible to the player,
a predetermined member provided around the predetermined electronic component (for example, a member for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.);
with
The predetermined member is characterized by having a color different from that of the predetermined electronic component.
According to this feature, general-purpose products can be used for the predetermined electronic components that are difficult or invisible to the player, without considering the balance with the predetermined members, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or 2,
A display means (for example, an image display device 5) is provided,
The electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) is provided at a position spaced apart from the display means more than the specific member (for example, an upper portion of the base member 301).
According to this feature, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
Provided above the electronic components (e.g., LED boards 603, 803) and protruding toward the player side from the electronic components (e.g., a protruding portion 3A),
The projecting portion is characterized by being larger than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the electronic component is in the shadow of the projecting portion and becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to form 4,
The electronic components (eg, LED substrates 603, 803) and the specific members (eg, base members 601, 801) are dark (eg, black) (modification)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the electronic component is more likely to be lost in the shadow of the projecting portion, so that it is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The specific member has a higher color brightness or saturation than the electronic component.
According to this feature, the visibility of the specific member is higher than that of the electronic component, so that the electronic component can be relatively inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) has a decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern 331) formed so as to straddle the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301). ) (see Figure 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the decoration pattern makes the electronic parts less conspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
The electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) is a circuit board,
The specified member (eg, base member 301) has a decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) at least partially common to the mode of the circuit pattern (eg, printed wiring 320) formed on the circuit board. provided (see Figures 10-12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the circuit pattern formed on the circuit board becomes inconspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to form 7 or 8,
The specific member (eg, base member 301) has a predetermined region (eg, rear wall portions 313A to 313D) that is visible from the player side without passing through the translucent member (eg, cover member 302). ,
A predetermined decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 341) identical or similar in form to the decorative pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) of the translucent member is provided in the predetermined region (see FIGS. 10-12).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes difficult to recognize that the specific member and the translucent member are different members.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) provided at a position corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED board 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401). (See Figure 10-19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so that they can be visually recognized by the player, the decorative parts make it difficult to see the boundary between the electronic parts and the specific member, making the electronic parts less noticeable, which increases the degree of design freedom. can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The decorative portion includes a plurality of decorative portions,
A plurality of predetermined decorative parts are provided at positions that do not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The plurality of decorative portions are characterized in that the number thereof is greater than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is obscured by the plurality of decorations, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
The translucent member (eg, cover member 402) has a boundary corresponding region corresponding to a boundary (eg, boundary portion BD) between the electronic component (eg, LED substrate 403) and the specific member (eg, base member 401). (e.g., convex portion 410) and a boundary non-corresponding region (e.g., region other than convex portion 410) that does not correspond to the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member,
The translucency of the boundary corresponding area is lower than that of the non-boundary corresponding area.
According to this feature, the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member is less visible to the player through the boundary corresponding area, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to form 11 or 12,
A logotype (eg, the letter “V”) is displayed on the decorative portion (eg, the decorative portion 420) (see FIGS. 10-19).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player is less likely to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 11 to 13,
The electronic component (eg, LED board 403) includes a light emitting means (eg, second effect LED 404A) capable of causing the decorative portion (eg, decorative portion 420) to emit light (see FIGS. 10-18).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous by light emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component is less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 14,
The light emitting means (for example, the second effect LED 404A) is provided so that the decorative portion (for example, the decorative portion 420) can emit surface light (for example, the light from the second effect LED 404A is emitted from the inner lens). The light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of 405 substantially uniformly and is incident on the area corresponding to the convex portion 410, so that the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the decorative portion is conspicuous due to the surface emission, it becomes difficult for the player to be aware of the boundary between the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component becomes less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
Around the electronic component (e.g., LED board 803) and the specific member (e.g., base member 801), a rendering means (e.g., third rendering unit 600) having higher visibility than the electronic component and the specific member is provided. provided (see Figures 10-20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the visibility of the effect means is higher than the visibility of the electronic parts, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous, so the degree of freedom in design is increased. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The effect means (eg, third effect unit 600) is provided closer to the player (front side) than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (see FIG. 10-22).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
A rendering section (eg, light-emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) is larger than the electronic component (eg, LED board 803) (FIG. 10 -20 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 18,
The rendering section (eg, light emitting rendering section 630) provided to be visible to the player in the rendering means (eg, third rendering unit 600) has a higher visibility than the color of the electronic component (eg, LED board 803). It is characterized by being a color with high .
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 16 to 19,
The effect means (for example, the third effect unit 600) has light-emitting means (for example, third effect LEDs 604A and 604B) capable of irradiating light toward the player side (see FIG. 10-21(A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to easily improve the visibility of the effect means.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 20,
It further comprises a specific translucent member (for example, the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700) which is a translucent member and is provided at a position different from the translucent member,
The transmittance (e.g., XA%, XB%) at which the light entering the light-transmitting member (e.g., cover member 302) is transmitted in a predetermined direction (e.g., T direction) is higher than the light entering the specific light-transmitting member. Lower than the transmittance (for example, Y%) that transmits light in the predetermined direction (see FIGS. 10-14)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the translucency of the light-transmitting member is lower than that of the specific light-transmitting member, so that the electronic parts are less conspicuous. degree of freedom can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The plate thickness of the light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302) is thicker than the plate thickness of the specific light-transmitting member (for example, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A) (see FIGS. 10-14). )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the translucency of the translucent member is low, the electronic components are less conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is colored in a predetermined color,
The predetermined color is the same color as the electronic component (for example, the LED substrate 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301).
According to this feature, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so the electronic component is less conspicuous.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left corner of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is performed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the game parlor attendant or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. Each of the first to fourth display units of the display monitor is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 8-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 8-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As still image data, for example, character image data, which is sprite image data, is image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used for driving the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The effect data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which the progression of effects is controlled, the effect data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapse signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK 131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK 124 . The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data reading process in which the CPU91AK131 reads fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data writing process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The instruction decoder 91AK141 decodes the instruction portion (instruction code) included in the display control instruction from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data of the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from the VDP 91AK132 to the CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, and rotation angle (phase) for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 8-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining procedures for displaying performance images, and the like are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is. The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the unit of is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the elapsed time as the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 8-3 shows an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the dynamic image display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 8-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big win)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD02, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach B (losing)", a moving image. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 8-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach A reach effects, and FIG. 8-4 (A2) shows SP reach A reach It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 8-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used in correspondence with SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information can use arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the content of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 8-5 (A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 8-5 (A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 8-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 8-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, as shown in FIG. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period different from the first text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. display. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 8-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, or left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 8-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 8-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 8-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 8-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thus, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The text image specified by the text display setting information 91AKB03 is displayed in the display style or display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03 common to the second text display period in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation information is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. During the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 8-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 8-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. In addition, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table, so that an increase in data capacity and processing load can be prevented. , it is possible to display various text images. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changeable accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white is displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of incongruity in displaying the text image.

FIGS. 8-7 show an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common battle effect display is performed in which friendly characters and enemy characters fight each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A) is effect contents common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image gradually changes from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout designated by the text display designation information. good.

Further, in the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode specified by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, with origin coordinates of (250,600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character alignment have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is. The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 8-7 (B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the words "hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image specification information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . The text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. In this way, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component, such as the display mode of the specific text image, may be changed at a plurality of timings.

FIG. 8-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 8-8(A) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the text decoration is not set.

FIG. 8-8(B) shows a case where a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 8-8(C) shows a case where a text image of the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds luster, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby improving the game performance with respect to the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIGS. 8-9 show display examples when a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a portion of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. In addition, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 for the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF for the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of other portions is changed according to the elapsed time during the execution of an arbitrary effect, not limited to situations in which the music is played or the voice of dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display contents, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 8-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters such as cursive or cursive is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image related data includes the specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and the normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may be configured to include separate field data relating to text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. The display color of the text image is not limited, and when a preset specific text image is displayed, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. The display of the text image may be rainbow-displayed as a whole by sequentially changing different display colors according to the in-character coordinates of the text image. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operation with the operation rod of the stick controller 31A. may be an arbitrary operation of tilting the , or an operation of pressing the push button 31b. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is “SP reach A (big hit)”, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios according to the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display is increased. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to the setting-suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at a different rate depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, or whether such a condition is satisfied or not. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, eg, as shown in FIGS. 8-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of moving images using the data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using the data stored in the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-8, the character image control means displays the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple timings. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 8-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, when a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, a glossy character image is displayed as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 01AK and 02AK)
FIG. 9-1 shows a configuration example 01AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK. In the configuration example 01AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 01AKA1, a first reserved display area 01AKB1, a second reserved display area 01AKB2, and a small symbol display area 01AKC1.

In the active display area 01AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. In the first reserved display area 01AKB1, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of first reserved memories. In the second reserved display area 01AKB2, a reserved display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display whose execution is reserved according to the number of second reserved memories. Thus, in the active display area 01AKA1, the first reserved display area 01AKB1, and the second reserved display area 01AKB2, active display and reserved display, which are specific displays, can be performed based on the information regarding the variable display. The pending display in the first pending display area 01AKB1 is also called "first pending display", and the pending display in the second pending display area 01AKB2 is also called "second pending display".

The first pending display area 01AKB1 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the right end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. The second pending display area 01AKB2 can display, for example, pending displays associated with pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end. It is only necessary that the display area is configured to do so. In the active display area 01AKA1, active display corresponding to the first reserved display erased (digested) in the first reserved display area 01AKB1 corresponding to the start of the first special game is started, and the second special game is started. Active display corresponding to the second pending display erased (digested) in the second pending display area 01AKB2 corresponding to the start is started. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area 01AKA1 may have the same color and pattern as the first reserved display and the second reserved display. For example, the active display is common to the first reserved display and the second reserved display. may be displayed larger than each hold display. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first reserved display and the second reserved display due to the execution of the active display change effect. Further, in the active display area 01AKA1, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be recognized separately from the first reserved display and the second reserved display.

At a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern display area 01AKC1 is arranged. The small pattern display area 01AKC1 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the right end on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. ing. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1, variable display of small patterns is executed in correspondence with variable display of special patterns and decoration patterns. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size as compared with the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and can be displayed in a variable manner in a manner that is partially or wholly common to each of the identification information images showing the decorative pattern. A reduced identification information image may be used. For example, if the identification information image showing the decoration pattern includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small pattern corresponds to the same pattern number as the part showing the number included in the decoration pattern. Since this is an image showing a number and does not include a part showing a character, it is sufficient if the small pattern can be displayed in a simpler manner than the effect image showing the decorative pattern. By displaying small symbols in a simple manner in the small symbol display area 01AKC1, it is sufficient to prevent the player from misunderstanding the display contents and display results of the small symbols. In the small pattern display area 01AKC1 provided on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns as reduced identification information is performed, and finalized small patterns as display results are derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 9B shows a configuration example of an effect drawing command. In this embodiment, commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG06 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect drawing commands. Command 01AKG01 is a drawing command that instructs color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling. The command 01AKG02 is a drawing command instructing a color blend that inverts color information. The command 01AKG03 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for blurring by changing magnification. A command 01AKG04 is a drawing command for instructing color blending for monochrome conversion. The command 01AKG05 is a drawing command instructing color blending for blurring by rotation. Command 01AKG06 is a drawing command instructing to change the offset amount of the image position.

The drawing command for effect may be prepared as one drawing command, or may be prepared as a display list. The display list is a group of commands for drawing control, and can be created by the CPU 91AK131 as a command string combining a plurality of commands for the VDP 91AK132. The VDP91AK132 can execute drawing processing in the order described in the display list. The drawing command for effect may be composed of a combination of command groups for setting a plurality of types of inter-pixel calculations. For example, a drawing command that instructs color blending may function as a drawing command for each effect by setting parameters according to the effect to be applied. For example, the internal register of the VDP91AK132 stores control data specifying the operation target included in the display list, numeric data specifying parameters, and other register values. By storing the register value according to the execution command, Drawing according to the display list is started.

When performing color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling in response to command 01AKG01, for example, a reduced image is generated by bilinear interpolation method texture mapping for image data. When generating this reduced image, a plurality of reduced images with different sampling point groups may be generated. Using a plurality of reduced images generated in this way, a combined reduced image is generated by executing a synthesis process based on color blending, such as alpha blending. After that, by performing enlargement processing of the synthesized reduced image, an image generated by changing color information included in image data can be drawn so as to obtain an image subjected to blurring processing.

In response to command 01AKG02, when executing color blending that inverts color information, for example, the maximum value (for example, 255) and , and perform difference calculation processing. For example, if the R value corresponding to "red" is "80", 255-80=175 is obtained, so that the color information can be inverted. The same difference calculation process is performed on the G value corresponding to "green" and the B value corresponding to "blue", so that the color information contained in the image data is converted into an image in which the color information is inverted. can be changed to render the generated image.

In response to command 01AKG03, when executing color blending for blurring by changing magnification, for example, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images are generated by scaling processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of enlarged images or reduced images having different magnifications such as image enlargement ratios and reduction ratios are generated. For example, for an image with a display magnification of 100%, two types of enlarged images are generated, such as an image with a display magnification of 102% and an image with a display magnification of 104%. A plurality of enlarged or reduced images generated in this manner and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data are used to perform synthesis processing by color blending, such as alpha blending, to perform blur processing. The image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that the image is obtained by changing the color information included in the image data.

When executing color blending for monochrome conversion in response to command 01AKG04, monochrome conversion arithmetic processing is executed for each pixel with respect to RGB values, which are color information of each pixel (one pixel) indicated by image data, for example. do. In the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing, by substituting the RGB values into the arithmetic expression for color tone conversion, the color information can be changed so that the image becomes monochrome. By executing the monochrome conversion arithmetic processing in this way, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data so as to obtain a monochrome converted image.

When color blending for blurring by rotation is executed in response to command 01AKG05, a plurality of rotated images are generated by, for example, rotation calculation processing on image data. At this time, a plurality of rotated images with different image rotation angles are generated. For example, for an image with a rotation angle of 0°, two types of rotated images are generated, such as an image with a rotation angle of 2° and an image with a rotation angle of 4°. An image that has undergone blurring processing by executing synthesis processing using color blending, such as alpha blending, using a plurality of rotated images generated in this way and an image (original image) corresponding to the original image data. An image generated by changing the color information included in the image data can be drawn so that

When changing the offset amount of the image position in response to the command 01AKG06, the position information of the image is changed by, for example, coordinate value conversion processing for the image data. In the coordinate value conversion process, position information for drawing an image, such as UV coordinate values, is changed according to an offset amount set as a parameter. UV coordinate values are given as texture coordinate attribute values when mapping a texture onto an object. By executing the coordinate value conversion process, it is possible to draw an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data so as to obtain an image with a different texture arrangement.

In this way, the drawing commands for effect may include commands such as commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 that enable drawing of an image generated by changing the color information included in the image data. Also, the effect drawing command may include a command, such as command 01AKG06, that enables drawing of an image generated by changing the position information corresponding to the image data. In addition, the effect drawing command may include a command that enables drawing of an image generated by changing arbitrary attribute information related to image data.

Unlike these drawing commands for effects, the CPU 91AK 131 can also generate drawing commands for normal display. The drawing command for normal display executes processing for drawing an image corresponding to the image data without changing color information or the like included in the image data by not executing synthesis processing by color blending or the like.

FIG. 9-3 shows a configuration example of a screen display including various effect images that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. A plurality of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 are drawn divided into a plurality of display layers. Different display priorities are set in advance for the plurality of display layers as display layers for effect images. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-3, layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 are provided as a plurality of display layers. Among them, the layer 01AKL1 is a display layer having the highest display priority, and draws an effect image showing a small pattern in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL2 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL1, and draws an effect image corresponding to the suspended display and the active display so as to be displayable. Also, the layer 01AKL2 may draw an effect image showing the pedestal below the active display so that it can be displayed. The layer 01AKL3 is a display layer having the next highest display priority after the layer 01AKL2, and draws an effect image or the like used for a chance-up effect of increasing the chance during reach. Layer 01AKL4 is a display layer with the next highest display priority after layer 01AKL3, and displays effects images showing decorative patterns in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Draw possible. The layer 01AKL5 is a display layer with the lowest display priority, and draws an effect image as a background image so that it can be displayed.

A display layer in which a plurality of effect images are arranged is designated by display priority information or the like included in the display list, for example. In the display list, the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 is designated as the first drawing target, and then the effect images placed on the respective display layers are designated as drawing targets in the order of layers 01AKL4, 01AKL3, 01AKL2, and 01AKL1. good too. Further, for example, the image data of the effect images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be set with a Z value, which is a depth value used when superimposing and drawing the respective effect images. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 may be different depending on the drawing destination layer. For example, a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value is arranged on the nearer side (front side) in the Z axis direction than a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value, and the display priority of the image is higher. You can do it like this.

When the VDP 91AK132 writes the image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like to the frame buffer provided in the VRAM 91AK147 or the like, the VDP 91AK132 may determine the display priority by comparing the Z values. At this time, for example, the image data of the effect image with a small Z value is written in the frame buffer with priority over the image data of the effect image with a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value has a higher display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the large value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the front side (front side). On the other hand, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower display priority than the effect image drawn on the display layer to which the small value is assigned as the Z value. It can be arranged on the back side (rear side) as seen. Note that the relationship between the Z value and the display priority may be a reverse relationship, and a display layer to which a large value is assigned as the Z value has a lower Z value than a display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value. It may be arranged on the front side (front side) in the axial direction so that the display priority of the image is high.

In this way, the drawing process of the effect image corresponding to the display layer is executed, and the display image 01AKD1 including the plurality of effect images is generated. The display image 01AKD1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 after synthesizing the images drawn on the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5 so as to be superimposed as a plurality of display layers with different display priorities.

Of the layers 01AKL1 to 01AKL5, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 are special layers, and layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 are specific layers. On layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, effect images can be drawn and displayed by drawing processing different from the effect images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer.

FIG. 9-4 is a flow chart showing an example of effect drawing synthesis processing executed by the VDP 91AK132. The effect drawing synthesizing process is executed, for example, when a display list including effect drawing commands is transferred based on the instruction code decoded by the instruction decoder 91AK141 of the VDP 91AK132. When the effect drawing/synthesizing process is started, image data to be subjected to the effect process is read out (step 01AKS01). For example, in the VDP 91AK132, image data to be processed is read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, and stored in the work area of the VRAM 91AK147 for temporary storage. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be processed from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and transfers it to the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147. It should be memorized. Image data to be subjected to effect processing is specified by a drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, among a plurality of display layers.

Thereafter, effect color blending is executed according to the drawing command (step 01AKS02). For example, the VDP 91AK132 executes, for example, one of the commands 01AKG01 to 01AKG05 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command using some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146. color blend according to the In the case of command 01AKG06, coordinate value conversion processing may be performed to change the offset amount of the image position in texture mapping.

After step 01AKS02, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the low-priority display layer (step 01AKS03). At this time, the image for which effect color blending has been executed in step 01AKS02 is drawn in the frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. For example, the VDP 91AK132 is drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 by executing inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by a drawing command by some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, character image renderer 91AK145, and text image renderer 91AK146. It suffices to store the images in the screen display frame buffer while synthesizing them according to the display priority. As a result, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, can be drawn for screen display after changing the color information of the image data by executing color blend for effect. can.

After step 01AKS03, an image is synthesized and drawn corresponding to the display layer of high priority (step 01AKS04). For example, the VDP 91AK132 reads image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, and draws it in a frame buffer for screen display in the VRAM 91AK147. An image in the low-priority display layer has already been drawn in this frame buffer in step 01AKS03. The data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 accesses the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 and the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147, and uses the VRAM 91AK 147 for screen display. It can be transferred to the frame buffer and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. The image data to be drawn in step 01AKS04 is specified by the drawing command as image data representing an image to be drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer among the plurality of display layers. As a result, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn for screen display without executing effect color blending and without changing the color information of the image data. can be done.

In this way, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute drawing processing for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 using image data stored in predetermined areas of the effect data memory 91AK 123 and VRAM 91AK 147 . In addition, by executing the effect drawing synthesis process, on the one hand, an image drawn on one of layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which is a specific layer, can be drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. On the other hand, an image drawn on either layer 01AKL1 or 01AKL2, which is a special layer, can be drawn corresponding to the image data.

When a display list containing drawing commands for normal display but not drawing commands for effect is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can execute normal drawing composition processing different from effect drawing composition processing. In the normal drawing synthesis process, the data transfer circuit of the VDP 91AK 132 reads the image data to be drawn from the effect data memory 91AK 123 or the buffer area of the VRAM 91AK 147 by accessing the address of the image data specified by the drawing command, and stores it in the VRAM 91AK 147. Then, the data is transferred to the frame buffer for screen display and stored. At this time, some or all of the moving image renderer 91AK144, the character image renderer 91AK145, and the text image renderer 91AK146 execute inter-pixel arithmetic processing specified by the drawing command, and draw on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, respectively. Images may be stored in a frame buffer for screen display while being synthesized according to the display priority. In this case, the image drawn on any of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, and the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are changed without color blending for effect. can be drawn for screen display without

FIG. 9-5 shows an execution example of image processing by effect drawing synthesis processing. In this case, in the display list containing the drawing commands for effect, the image data to be subjected to effect processing are the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 among the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 included in the specific layer, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4 and the image data 01AKD05 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are designated respectively. When the VDP 91AK 132 reads these image data in step 91AKS 01 of the effect drawing synthesis process, they are temporarily stored in a sub-frame buffer 01AKF 01 provided in the work area of the VRAM 91AK 147 or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A1), image data 01AKD03 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL3, image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL4, and effect image data 01AKD04 of the effect image placed on the layer 01AKL5 are obtained. The image data 01AKD05 of the image is stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01.

Subsequently, the VDP 91AK 132 performs effect color blending on the image data stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 in step 91AKS02 of the effect drawing synthesis process. For example, when a command 01AKG04 designates a color blend for monochrome conversion as an effect drawing command, the color information included in the image data is changed by executing monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. As a result, the image data 01AKD03 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD13 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD04 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD14 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2). The image data 01AKD05 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is changed in color information so as to become monochrome-converted image data 01AKD15 as shown in FIG. 9-5(A2).

After that, the VDP 91AK 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the low-priority display layer in step 91AKS03 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. For example, the image data read from the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 is written and stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order from the display layer with the lowest display priority. At this time, overwriting of image data or hidden surface removal may be executed according to the display priority. Of the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 shown in FIG. 9-5(A2), the image data 01AKD15 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL5 is read first and written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02. memorize with The image data 01AKD14 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL4 is read second and superimposed on the image data 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 to be combined. The image data 01AKD13 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL3 is read third, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD14 and 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 for synthesis.

Then, the VDP 91AKD 132 synthesizes an image corresponding to the high-priority display layer in step 91AKS04 of the effect drawing synthesis processing. At this time, of the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2 included in the special layer, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is first designated as the image data to be drawn, for example, by a drawing command included in the display list. , and the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is specified next. The VDP 91AK 132 writes and stores the image data in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 each time it reads the image data. That is, among the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 to be drawn, the image data 01AKD02 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL2 is read first, and superimposed on the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02. Write and synthesize. Finally, the image data 01AKD01 of the effect image arranged on the layer 01AKL1 is read, and superimposed and written on the image data 01AKD02, 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 stored in the main frame buffer 01AKF02.

In this way, the image data 01AKD03 to 01AKD05 temporarily stored in the sub-frame buffer 01AKF01 are converted into the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 in which the color information is changed by color blending for effect, and the image data 01AKD13 to 01AKD15 after the conversion are given priority for display. The data are written to the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in order according to the frequency. After that, the image data 01AKD01 and 01AKD02 are written in the main frame buffer 01AKF02 in the order according to the display priority without changing the color information by not performing color blending for effect. Therefore, 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, are drawn by specific drawing processing such as color blending for effects, and display various images for effects such as background images, effect images showing decorative patterns, and effect images for increasing chances during reach. It is possible. On the other hand, 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, are drawn by normal drawing processing that does not perform color blending for effects, and effects such as effect images showing pending display and active display, effect images showing small symbols, etc. A related predetermined image can be displayed.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of image display by execution of effect drawing synthesis processing. When the display list including the effect drawing command is transferred, the VDP 91AK 132 can display the effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data by executing the effect drawing synthesizing process. .

FIG. 9-6A shows an image display example 01AKM01 in the case of monochrome conversion. When a display list including command 01AKG04 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, an effect image drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing among color blends for effect is displayed in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. It is possible. The monochrome conversion calculation process is a process for drawing with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data. As a result, the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM01, are drawn by monochrome conversion arithmetic processing for drawing with fewer colors than the color information included in the image data as the specific drawing processing. A production image can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM01, can be drawn without changing the color information and the like included in the image data by normal drawing processing, and can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game.

FIG. 9-6B shows an image display example 01AKM02 in the case of color information inversion. When a display list containing command 01AKG02 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, it is possible to display an image for effect drawn by difference calculation processing among color blends for effect in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is. The difference calculation process is a process for drawing by converting the value of color information included in the image data so as to be inverted by the difference from the maximum value. As a result, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers of the image display example 01AKM02, as specific drawing processing, drawing is performed by difference calculation processing for converting the value of color information included in the image data and drawing, and an effect image is drawn. can be displayed. Layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers of the image display example 01AKM02, can display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game by drawing without converting the values of color information included in the image data by normal drawing processing.

In addition, when a display list including the command 01AKG01 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring by bilinear sampling as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the color information included in the image data. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG03 is transferred as a drawing command for effect, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is processed by combining color blending for blurring by changing magnification as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display a rendering image drawn by changing the color information contained in the . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG05 is transferred as an effect drawing command, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, perform color blending for blurring due to rotation as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the included color information. In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the color information or the like contained in the image data by the normal drawing process, so that a predetermined image relating to the progress of the game can be displayed.

When a display list including command 01AKG06 is transferred as an effect drawing command, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, image data is converted by coordinate value conversion processing for changing the offset amount of the image position as specific drawing processing. It is possible to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to . In this case, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are the special layers, may be drawn without changing the position information corresponding to the image data by normal drawing processing, and display a predetermined image regarding the progress of the game.

By using these drawing commands for effects, it is possible to create an effect image drawn by changing the color information contained in the image data, or an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data, on a specific layer. can be displayed. As a result, even an effect image drawn using common image data can be drawn by changing color information or position information by making it possible to execute different image processing according to the effect drawing command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing, and to execute various display effects to improve the amusement of the game.

FIG. 9-7(A) shows a setting example of the big hit reliability according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The big hit reliability for each ready-to-win effect is the ratio of cases where the variable display result is "big win" and controlled to the big win game state among the cases where each ready-to-win effect is executed. In this setting example, the reliability of the big win is set to be different according to a plurality of types of reach effects such as SP reach A1 to A3 or SP reach B, which are super reach. For example, in the variable display pattern determination table, by assigning a determination value to be compared with a random value for determining the variable display pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to be a "big hit" is set differently according to multiple types of ready-to-win effects. It is good if there is

SP reach A1-A3 is the reach production of super reach whose big hit reliability is lower than SP reach B, and is also called "weak SP reach". The SP reach B is a reach performance of a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the SP reach A1 to A3, and is also called "strong SP reach". For example, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A1 is 20%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A2 is 25%, the jackpot reliability of SP reach A3 is 30%, and the jackpot reliability of SP reach B is 80%. is. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect of SP reach A1 is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about once out of five times. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed, the variable display result is "big hit" about four times out of five times. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which commonality can be partially recognized in the case of the SP reach-to-reach A1 to A3. For example, the SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display a common moving image as a background image. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animated with a common character image. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which the difference between the SP reach-B and the SP reach-A1 to A3 can be recognized. For example, for SP reach B, a moving image different from SP reach A1 to A3 may be reproduced and displayed as a background image. Alternatively, SP reach B may be animated with a character image different from SP reach A1 to A3. The contents of the ready-to-win effect may include an effect mode in which one of the cases of SP reach A1 to A3 can recognize the difference from other cases. For example, SP reach A1 to A3 may reproduce and display different moving images as background images. Alternatively, the SP reach A1 to A3 may be animation-displayed with different character images. In addition, the presentation mode in which the difference can be recognized is arbitrary display on the screen of the image display device 5, arbitrary sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and arbitrary display using light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. light emission, any action using the movable member for presentation, or a combination of some or all of these.

The execution of a super reach effect, such as SP reach A1 to A3, includes the execution of a drawing effect by displaying an image drawn in response to an effect drawing command. As the drawing effect, it may be possible to select and execute one of a plurality of types of display effects capable of displaying an image drawn by different drawing processes according to the effect drawing command. As a drawing effect, the image drawn in response to the drawing command for effect is not displayed, but even if it is possible to display the image drawn in response to a drawing command different from the drawing command for effect good. When the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, even if it includes the case of executing the display of the image drawn in response to only the drawing command for normal display without executing a specific drawing effect good.

FIG. 9-7(B) shows a setting example of the content of drawing effect corresponding to the drawing effect pattern. In this setting example, drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are prepared in advance as a plurality of drawing effect patterns. Some or all of the drawing effect contents are different according to these plurality of drawing effect patterns. The content of the drawing effect includes presence/absence and type of drawing effect by effect display, and presence/absence of drawing effect by strobe display. A drawing effect that does not include effect display or strobe display is also called a normal drawing effect. A drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is also called a specific drawing effect.

Effect display is effect display in which color information included in image data is changed and an image is drawn when an effect drawing command is generated and transferred. The types of effect display include a monochrome conversion effect and a color information inversion effect. The monochromatic conversion effect draws and displays a monochromatically converted effect image using the command 01AKG04 among the effect drawing commands. The color information inversion effect uses command 02 among the effect drawing commands to draw and display an effect image in which the color information is inverted. In this way, the effect display may be any effect image that is rendered by changing the color information included in the image data. For the effect display, for example, the command 01AKG06 among the effect drawing commands may be used to display an effect image drawn by changing the position information corresponding to the image data.

Strobe display is an effect display in which an image drawn using image data and a single-color (for example, black or white) image set differently from the image data are alternately and repeatedly displayed every predetermined number of frames. is. Strobe display may be performed on images drawn on layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, when a drawing command different from the effect drawing command is generated and transferred. On the other hand, strobe display may not be performed for images drawn on layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers. In this way, strobe display may be performed within the range of the image drawn on the specific layer, but may be restricted as a limit such that it is not performed within the range of the image drawn on the special layer. A pause display may be performed along with the strobe display. The pause display is an effect display that gives the impression that the progress of the effect due to the display of the image is paused by continuously displaying the same image over a predetermined number of consecutive frames. It should be noted that, when strobe display is not executed, temporary stop display may be performed.

FIG. 9-8 shows an example of determination of drawing effect patterns. For example, in the effect control process process of step S76, when the variable display start setting process is executed in step S171, a plurality of drawing It suffices if one of the production patterns can be determined. When the variable display pattern corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of super reach is specified, the CPU 91AK131 extracts a random number value for determining the drawing effect pattern, and based on the random value, according to the variable display result and the content of the ready-to-win effect, A drawing effect pattern may be determined by referring to the drawing effect pattern determination table.

In the determination example shown in Fig. 9-8, if the variable display result is "losing", if the content of reach effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it will be drawn at a rate of 60% (= 60/100) Effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and 5% (=5 /100), drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 5% = (5/100). be done. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", if the content of reach effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined at a rate of 5% (=5/100). , the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined at a rate of 10% (=10/100), the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 15% (=15/100), and the drawing effect pattern 02AKB01 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100). Drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined, drawing effect pattern 02AKB11 is determined at a rate of 20% (=20/100), and drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined at a rate of 30% (=30/100). Due to such a determined ratio, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and the drawing effect patterns other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 have different ratios of control to the big win game state when the variable display result is "big hit".

The drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is a pattern in which a specific drawing effect, which is a drawing effect using effect display or strobe display, is not executed. On the other hand, drawing effect patterns 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, and 02AKB12 are patterns for executing a specific drawing effect by one or both of effect display and strobe display. Then, when the ready-to-win effect content is any one of SP reach A1 to A3, when the variable display result is "big win", the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". The ratio of determination to the drawing effect pattern other than . Therefore, when the content of the reach effect is any of the SP reach A1 to A3, when the specific drawing effect, which is the drawing effect by the effect display or the strobe display, is executed, the specific drawing effect is not executed. , the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of being controlled to the big win game state increases. Further, the drawing performance patterns other than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01 are set according to the variable display result so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the drawing performance pattern 02AKA01.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, only the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 can be determined, and a restriction is provided so as not to determine anything other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. When the content of the ready-to-win performance is SP ready-to-win B, super-ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “strong SP ready-to-win” with higher reliability of big win than SP ready-to-win A1 to A3 is executed. In such a case, if a specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the reach effect of super reach, which has a high hit reliability, and there is a risk of reducing the interest in the game. be. Therefore, within the range where the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-reach B, a limitation is provided as a limit that the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being disturbed with respect to the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, which has a high degree of reliability for big hits, and to appropriately improve the amusement of the game.

When the content of the ready-to-win effect is any of SP reach A1 to A3, it is possible to determine any of the drawing effect patterns 02AKA01, 02AKA02, 02AKB01, 02AKB02, 02AKB11, 02AKB12 at different ratios according to the variable display result. . When the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, a super ready-to-win ready-to-win performance of “weak SP ready-to-win” with lower reliability of big win than SP ready-to-B is executed. In such a case, when a specific drawing performance is executed by effect display or strobe display, the variable display result becomes "big win" and the ratio of control to the big win game state increases. In this way, when the content of ready-to-win performance is any one of SP ready-to-win A1 to A3, execution of the specific drawing performance increases the ratio of control to the big win game state, so super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win. Even with the ready-to-win effect, the execution of the specific drawing effect increases the expectation of the player and appropriately enhances the game interest.

It should be noted that even when the content of the ready-to-win effect is SP ready-to-win B, it may be possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a predetermined ratio. However, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is the SP ready-to-win effect B, it is possible to determine a drawing effect pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 at a lower rate than when the content of the ready-to-reach effect is the SP reachable effects A1 to A3. In this way, in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach-B, the specific drawing effect by effect display or strobe display can be executed at a lower rate than in the range where the ready-to-win effect content is SP reach A1 to A3. may be set as a limit.

FIG. 9-9(A) shows an effect execution period in variable display of super reach. When variable display of super reach is performed, the period from the start of variable display to the end of variable display can be divided into a plurality of effect execution periods such as effect execution periods D0 to D4. The effect execution period D0 is a period from the start of the variable display to the start of execution of the ready-to-win effect after the ready-to-win game is established. The performance execution period D1 is a period from the start of the ready-to-win performance execution period in which the ready-to-win performance as super ready-to-win performance is executed to the start of the chance-up performance execution period in which the chance-up performance can be executed. The performance execution period D2 is a period from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result-informing performance execution period in which the result-informing performance can be executed after the chance-up performance execution period ends. The result notification effect may be any effect as long as it notifies the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display in the ready-to-win effect that becomes super reach. The effect execution period D3 is a period from the start of the result notification effect execution period to the end thereof. The effect execution period D4 is a period from the end of the result notification effect execution period to the end of the variable display.

FIG. 9-9(B) shows an effect control example 02AKC01 in each effect execution period. Among the plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, in the performance execution period D2 from the start of the chance-up performance execution period to the start of the result notification performance execution period, when the drawing performance pattern is other than 02AKA01, the specific drawing performance SPE is performed. become viable. In the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, since the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed even in the effect execution period D2 without executing the specific drawing effect SPE.

Among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4, in the effect execution period D0 from the start of variable display to the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. For example, in the effect execution period D0, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, if it is possible to execute the light emitting effect using the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to the output of BGM and sound effects good. In addition, during the effect execution period D0, when the decorative design is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, or when the "left", "middle" and "right" ', the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stop displaying the decorative patterns that constitute the pseudo consecutive chances, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs are turned on in response to BGM and sound effect output. It may be possible to execute a light emitting effect using. In addition, during the entire effect execution period D0, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed, and the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs emit light in response to the BGM and sound effect output during the execution of the variable display. It may be possible to perform a production.

Among the effect execution periods D1 to D4 in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed during the execution of the variable display, in the effect execution period D1 following the effect execution period D0, the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. , the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed. In the effect execution period D2 after the effect execution period D1, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. be. In the normal drawing effect NOR based on the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, an image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed. In the specific drawing effect SPE by the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01, for example, in the specific layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed. Note that even when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a pattern other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, for example, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

In the effect execution period D3 and the effect execution period D4 after the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is not executed and the normal drawing effect NOR regardless of whether it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 or other than the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01. becomes viable. In the effect execution period D3, as in the effect execution period D2, the normal drawing effect NOR can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the case of the drawing effect pattern other than 02AKA01. may be When the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in the effect execution period D3, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is performed in the normal drawing in the effect execution period D4 for notifying fixed decoration patterns, etc., which are the result of variable display. It suffices to return to the execution of the effect NOR. Further, the specific drawing effect SPE may be executable in all of the plurality of effect execution periods D1 to D4. Execution of the specific drawing performance SPE can be started based on the determination result that the ready-to-reach performance of super-ready-to-win is executed as a determination result at the time of start winning, before the variable display to execute the ready-to-reach performance of super-ready-to-win. You may do so. Even if the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed in a period other than the effect execution period D2, for example, in 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, Images drawn by specific drawing processing can be displayed. For example, layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display images drawn by normal drawing processing.

Among a plurality of performance execution periods D0 to D4, when the normal drawing performance NOR is executed even in a period other than the performance execution period D0, a light emission performance using a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs is performed. It is viable. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, control is performed so that the light emitting effect is not executed. For example, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs is turned off so that the light emitting effect is not executed. In this way, when the normal drawing effect NOR capable of displaying the image drawn by the normal drawing process is executed, the light emitting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. On the other hand, when the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying the image drawn by the specific drawing process is executed, the lighting effect by the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 is not executed. Therefore, within the range of the effect execution period during which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed in which the image drawn by the normal drawing process can be displayed, the light emitting effect by the light emission of the light emitting member can be executed, while the image drawn by the specific drawing process is enabled. In the range of the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE capable of displaying is executed, there is a limitation as a limit that the light emission effect by the light emission of the light emitting member is not executed. When the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is executed, by not executing the light emitting effect, the player can easily recognize the image drawn by the specific drawing process. The display can improve amusement in the game.

Note that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in the effect execution period D2 or the like, the restriction is not limited to not executing the light emitting effect by light emission of the light emitting member, and for example, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. A limitation may be provided to the effect mode of the light emitting effect, such as reducing the effect amount of the light emitting effect more than in the case of using the light emitting effect. When the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect amount is reduced by reducing the light emission amount (luminance) of the light emitting member in the light emission effect compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is limited by reducing the number of light emitting members capable of emitting light in the light emitting effect as compared to when the normal drawing effect NOR is executed. may be provided. Alternatively, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the amount of effect is reduced by reducing the emission color used in the light emission effect (e.g., monochromatic light emission) compared to when the normal drawing process NOR is executed. A limit may be set as follows.

FIGS. 9-10 to 9-13 show execution examples of reach effects and drawing effects. FIGS. 9-10 show an effect execution example when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is determined among the cases where the ready-to-win effect of super reach is executed. FIG. 9-11 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02 is determined. FIG. 9-12 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is determined. FIG. 9-13 shows an effect execution example in the effect execution period D2 when the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 is determined.

FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM01 in the case where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is the ready-to-win mode and the ready-to-win game is established. At this time, in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the common decorative patterns corresponding to the number "7" are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) to establish a ready-to-win state. , reach production of normal reach is executed. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM01, it is possible to appropriately execute the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect corresponding to the effect execution period D0. For example, it is only necessary to be able to execute a light emitting effect using light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and other decorative LEDs in response to BGM and sound effect output from the establishment of reach to the development of super reach.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM02 in the case where the ready-to-win effect of the normal reach is changed to the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win in response to the start of the effect execution period D1. FIGS. 9-10(C) and 9-10(D) show production execution examples 02AKM03 and 02AKM04 when the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win progresses in the production execution period D1. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM02 to 02AKM04, in response to the effect execution period D1, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect can be executed. Do not run SPE.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM05 in the case where the during-reach chance-up effect is executed in the effect execution period D2. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM06 when the ready-to-win effect is executed after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2. In the case of the effect execution examples 02AKM05 and 02AKM06, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emission effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 is executed corresponding to the effect execution period D2. At this time, since it is the drawing effect pattern 02AKA01, the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display is not executed.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM07 when the result notification effect is executed in the effect execution period D3. At this time, as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, a ready-to-win effect with different effect contents depending on the result of the variable display is executed. Then, the fixed decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed by shaking display or the like. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM07, corresponding to the effect execution period D3, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 9-10(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM08 in the case where the fixed notification of the variable display result is executed in the effect execution period D4. At this time, as the ready-to-win performance of super-ready to finish is completed, the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed by a complete stop display. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM08, corresponding to the effect execution period D4, regardless of the determination result of the drawing effect pattern, the normal drawing effect NOR accompanied by the light emitting effect can be executed, and the specific drawing effect SPE can be executed. don't run

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 02AKM11 when the in-reach chance-up effect is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2. The effect display at this time may be the same as the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05. However, the temporary stop display may be started in response to drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. For example, images drawn in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, may be copied to a copy area provided in the VRAM 91AK147 and stored reusably. Further, in response to execution of the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display, control is performed so as not to execute the light emission effect.

FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM12 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM11. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM12, a black image as a whole is drawn and displayed as a single-color image in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM13 in the case of executing the effect display of pause display during strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM12. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM13, by repeating the pause display started in effect execution example 02AKM11, it is sufficient that the pause display can be executed during strobe display. For example, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, an image read out from the copy area of the VRAM 91AK147 may be drawn to repeatedly display an image pause similar to the effect execution example 02AKM11.

FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM14 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM12 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM13. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM15 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11 and 02AKM13 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM14. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM16 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12 and 02AKM14 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM15. FIG. 9-11(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM17 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM11, 02AKM13, and 02AKM15 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM16. FIG. 9-11(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM18 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM14, and 02AKM16 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM17. In this way, by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using the image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data, it is possible to perform temporary stop display as well as strobe display. . After the stroboscope display of effect execution example 02 AKM18 is completed, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed and control is performed to execute the light emitting effect.

Such strobe display can be executed without using dedicated image data by using an image with settings different from the image data according to a drawing command transferred from the CPU 91AK131 to the VDP 91AK132. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by strobe display can be executed in accordance with the drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR does not affect the player. Since different impressions can be given, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data amount of image data and to execute various display effects to improve amusement in the game.

In FIG. 9-12(A), corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, when the chance-up effect during reach is executed, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 is executed. This shows an effect execution example 02AKM21. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. is doing.

FIG. 9-12(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM22 in the case of executing strobe display subsequent to the effect execution example 02AKM21. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM22, as in effect execution example 02AKM12, layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers, draw and display an image that is entirely black as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, only need to be able to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-12(C) shows an effect execution example 02AKM23 in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a monochrome conversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB02 during the execution of the chance-up effect during reaching, following the effect execution example 02AKM22. is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM23, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM21 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific rendering effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect, even when the strobe display is executed, as in the effect execution example 02AKM05, by displaying the image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time, The temporary stop display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-12(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM24 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM22 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM23. FIG. 9-12(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM25 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM24. The effect display at this time is different from the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06 in that the layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are the specific layers, display an image drawn by a specific drawing process such as monochrome conversion arithmetic processing. is doing.

FIG. 9-12(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM26 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22 and 02AKM24 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM25. FIG. 9-12(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM27 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM25 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM26. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM27, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in the effect execution example 02AKM25 can be continued. As a ready-to-reach effect during strobe display, pause display may be executed, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by the color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-12(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM28 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM22, 02AKM24, and 02AKM26 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM27. In this way, alternately and repeatedly switching between an image obtained by monochrome conversion, which is drawn by reducing the number of colors in the color information by monochrome conversion calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying with , it is possible to execute the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect together with the stroboscopic display.

Effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, uses an image drawn with a smaller number of colors than the color information included in the image data in accordance with the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132. It can be executed regardless of the data. As a result, even if the image for effect is drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command. Since the impression given to the player can be varied, it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining the effect display, which is a monochrome conversion effect, and the strobe display, the player can easily recognize the color change of the display image, and the display effect can be achieved while preventing the data amount of the image data from increasing. It is possible to enhance the impression of the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In FIG. 9-13(A), when the chance-up effect during reach is executed corresponding to the start of the effect execution period D2, the specific drawing effect SPE is executed by the color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12. It shows an effect execution example 02AKM31. Compared to the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM05, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(B) shows an effect execution example 02AKM32 in the case of executing strobe display following the effect execution example 02AKM31. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM32, as in effect execution examples 02AKM12, 02AKM22, etc., layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5 serving as specific layers draw and display an entirely black image as a single-color image. At this time, the layers 01AKL1 and 01AKL2, which are special layers, may display an image drawn by the normal drawing process.

FIG. 9-13(C) is an effect execution example in which a specific drawing effect SPE is executed by a color information inversion effect according to the drawing effect pattern 02AKB12 during the execution of the chance-up effect during reaching, following the effect execution example 02AKM32. 02AKM33 is shown. In the case of the effect execution example 02AKM33, it is sufficient if the in-reach chance-up effect started in the effect execution example 02AKM31 can be continuously executed. It should be noted that a temporary stop display may be executed as a chance-up effect during strobe display. Alternatively, in the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversal effect, even when strobe display is executed, an image drawn using the image data read according to the elapsed time is displayed as in the effect execution example 02AKM05. , the pause display of the chance-up effect may not be executed.

FIG. 9-13(D) shows an effect execution example 02AKM34 in which an image similar to the effect execution example 02AKM32 is repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM33. FIG. 9-13(E) shows an effect execution example 02AKM35 when the ready-to-win effect after the chance-up effect in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM34. Compared to the effect display in the effect execution example 02AKM06, the effect display at this time is an image drawn by converting the value of color information by a difference calculation process, which is a specific drawing process, in layers 01AKL3 to 01AKL5, which are specific layers. is displayed.

FIG. 9-13(F) shows an effect execution example 02AKM36 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32 and 02AKM034 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM35. FIG. 9-13(G) shows an effect execution example 02AKM37 when the ready-to-win effect after the effect execution example 02AKM35 in the effect execution period D2 is executed following the effect execution example 02AKM36. In the case of effect execution example 02AKM37, it is sufficient if the ready-to-win effect executed in effect execution example 02AKM35 can be continued. It should be noted that pause display may be executed as a reach effect during strobe display, or pause display may not be executed as a specific drawing effect SPE by color information conversion effect. FIG. 9-13(H) shows an effect execution example 02AKM38 in which images similar to those of the effect execution examples 02AKM32, 02AKM34, and 02AKM36 are repeatedly displayed following the effect execution example 02AKM37. In this way, the image is alternately and repeatedly switched between an image obtained by inverting color information drawn by converting the value of color information by difference calculation processing using image data, and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. By displaying it, it is possible to perform a specific drawing effect SPE by a color information reversal effect together with strobe display.

The effect display, which is the color information reversal effect, uses an image drawn by converting the value of color information included in the image data according to the drawing command for effect transferred from the CPU 91AK 131 to the VDP 91AK 132, and uses dedicated image data. It can be executed regardless of As a result, even for an effect image drawn using common image data, the specific drawing effect SPE by the color information reversing effect can be executed in accordance with the effect drawing command, so that the normal drawing effect NOR and the normal drawing effect NOR are realized. can give different impressions to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the data amount of the image data from increasing and execute various display performances to improve the interest in the game. In addition, by combining effect display, which is a color information reversal effect, and strobe display, the player can easily recognize the change in color of the displayed image, thereby preventing an increase in the amount of image data while displaying the image. It is possible to enhance the impression of the performance and improve the amusement of the game.

By executing the specific drawing effect SPE by effect display or strobe display, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity of the display effect that is not present in the normal drawing effect NOR. When the content of ready-to-win production is any one of SP ready-to-reach A1 to A3, a super-ready-to-win ready-to-win production of “weak SP ready-to-win” with a lower reliability level than the case of SP ready-to-B is executed. It is possible to execute a specific drawing effect SPE that gives a sense of incongruity in the display effect not found in the normal drawing effect NOR. Then, when the specific drawing performance SPE is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state increases, so that the player's expectations can be heightened and the amusement of the game can be appropriately improved.

The invention relating to the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features related to the feature parts 01AK and 02AK. It may be one provided with a part.

The strobe display has been described as being performed by alternately and repeatedly switching between an image drawn using image data and a single-color image with settings different from the image data. In such strobe display, there may be a case where a single-color image is partially or entirely replaced with a specific image prepared in advance. For example, when inserting and displaying a performance image that is a character image as a specific image, the display result of the variable display becomes "big win" and is controlled to a big win game state, as compared with the case where a single color image is repeatedly displayed. The drawing effect content of the drawing effect pattern and the determined ratio may be set so that the ratio is high.

It has been explained that when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the light emitting effect using the light emitting member is not executed. The light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a light emitting display effect by causing the display portion of the light guide plate to emit light. For example, a light guide plate as a transparent light guide member having light transmittance is provided on the front side (front side) of part or all of the display screen of the image display device 5 . Also, a light emitting member such as a light guide plate LED is provided near the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting member is introduced through the end face of the light guide plate and reflected by a reflection portion formed in advance inside the light guide plate. Then, a light-emitting display effect for displaying a predetermined pattern or the like may be executed. Then, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the light emitting display effect can be executed based on the determination result of the light emitting display effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the light emission display effect is not executed.

Further, the light emitting effect using such a light emitting member may include a button light emitting effect by causing a button light emitting portion mounted inside the push button 31B to emit light. In this case, in the effect execution period in which the normal drawing effect NOR is executed corresponding to the drawing effect pattern etc., it is sufficient if the button light emitting effect can be executed based on the determination result of the button light emitting effect pattern. On the other hand, in the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed in accordance with the drawing effect pattern or the like, control may be performed so that the button light emitting effect is not executed.

When a plurality of display layers are provided, the setting as to whether each display layer is a special layer or a specific layer can be arbitrarily changed based on the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, a layer 01AKL2 that draws an effect image corresponding to a suspended display or an active display so as to be displayable may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In the setting that the layer 01AKL2 is included in the specific layer, when the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, the effect images corresponding to the suspended display and the active display are drawn and displayed by the specific drawing process, and the color information, etc. may be changed. Then, when the specific drawing effect SPE by the monochrome conversion effect is executed, it is sufficient if the effect image corresponding to the suspended display or the active display can be changed to a monochrome image with a small number of colors and displayed. While enabling the monochrome display of such a suspended display and active display, when it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display color of a specific display related to variable display, such as a suspended display and an active display, a specific drawing effect SPE , the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be terminated when the display color of the specific display is changed, and the execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. The display color of the specific display should be different according to the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state. When the change effect includes a success pattern of changing the display color of the specific display and a failure pattern of not changing the display color of the specific display, the change effect of the success pattern is executed during execution of the specific drawing effect SPE, Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the display color of the specific display changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed. At the timing when the pending display is displayed, the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE is started, and after the variable display and active display corresponding to the pending display are performed, the success pattern changing effect is executed, and the display color of the active display is changed. Execution of the specific drawing effect SPE may be ended when the color changes to the specific color, and execution of the normal drawing effect NOR may be started or resumed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a direction display layer may be included that draws a displayable effect image or the like indicating the shooting direction of the game ball. For example, in the direction display layer, as an operation promotion effect for left-handed or right-handed effects, a performance image that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area when the shooting promotion effect is executed is displayed. It is sufficient if it can be drawn and displayed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a game can be played by shooting game balls as game media, and a first route and a second route are provided as movement routes along which the game balls can flow. The first path may be a right-handed path that is the right side of the game area, and the second path may be a left-handed area of the game area. In the first state in which it is advantageous to let the game ball flow down the first path, the first promotion image for prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the first path can be drawn and displayed on the direction display layer. If it is Further, when the second state is advantageous for the game ball to flow down the second path, the second promotion image prompting the shooting of the game medium toward the second path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be possible to draw and display on the direction display layer. In this way, since the direction display layer is included in the special layer, an image drawn by the specific drawing process can be displayed in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the effect image prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area or the right game area may be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process as a predetermined image related to the game. The image that prompts the shooting of the game medium can be drawn and displayed by normal rendering processing instead of the specific rendering processing, so that the visibility of the image that prompts the shooting of the game media is appropriately ensured, and various display effects are executed. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

As the operation-promoting effect, it may be possible to draw and display a effect image that indicates that the effect output amount can be changed, such as a part or all of the volume, screen brightness, and light emission amount. As a display layer included in the special layer, an operation display layer may be included that draws an effect image or the like in such an operation promotion effect so that it can be displayed.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a warning display layer for drawing a warning image or the like for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so as to be displayable may be included. For example, in the warning display layer, various sensors connected to the main board 11 in the pachinko game machine 1, such as a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor, a vibration sensor, a door open sensor, a grand prize entrance door sensor, a full tank sensor, and a ball out sensor. When it is determined that various errors have occurred based on the state, the state of the payout board, the detection state of the game ball by the start switch, the count switch, etc., a warning image corresponding to the error that occurred is drawn and displayed. If possible. The warning display layer may be set to the display layer with the highest display priority among the plurality of display layers. In this way, by including the warning display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the warning The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Therefore, the warning image for reporting the occurrence of an abnormality may be a predetermined image related to the game, as long as it can be drawn and displayed on the special layer by the normal drawing process. The warning image that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality can be drawn and displayed using normal drawing processing instead of a specific drawing process. You can run it to improve your gaming interest. When notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, even during the execution of the specific drawing effect SPE in which no light emitting effect is executed, the light emitting member may be caused to emit light to notify the abnormality light emission. In this way, notification regarding the occurrence of an abnormality may be executed with a higher priority than other effects.

As a display layer included in the special layer, a suggestion display layer that draws an effect image in the setting suggestion effect so as to be displayable may be included. For example, the suggestion display layer may draw and display setting suggestion images determined at different ratios according to the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. It suffices if it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different determination ratios. For example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of setting suggesting images at different ratios depending on the setting value, draw the selected setting suggesting image on the suggestive display layer, and display the selected setting suggesting image. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. An image suggesting a set value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed on a special layer by normal drawing processing instead of specific drawing processing, so that images suggesting set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be displayed. It is possible to enhance amusement in a game by executing various display effects while appropriately ensuring visibility. Alternatively, the suggestive display layer may be included in the specific layer instead of the special layer. In this way, by including the suggestive display layer in the specific layer, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the special layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed, whereas the suggestive display layer can be displayed in the special layer. The display layer may display an image drawn by a specific drawing process. The image suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 can be drawn and displayed in the specific layer by the specific drawing process, thereby diversifying the display of the image suggesting the setting value with different advantages for the player. , can improve the game interest.

At least part of the features of the pachinko game machine 1 can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. As an example of application to this slot machine, it is possible to control an assist time (also referred to as AT), which is a notification period during which navigation notification for notifying the stopping order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result can be executed. As the navigation notification, an effect image may be displayed on the screen of the image display device to notify the stopping order in an identifiable manner. In this case, a display layer included in the special layer may include a notification display layer that renders a displayable effect image used for navigation notification. For example, in the notification display layer, when notifying the order to stop the variable display by the left, middle and right reels, if it is possible to draw and display a stop order image indicating the order of the stop operation by the stop switch on the notification display layer good. In this way, by including the notification display layer in the special layer, it is possible to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific layer during the effect execution period in which the specific drawing effect SPE is executed. The display layer only needs to be able to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing. Visibility of the image notifying the operation mode by drawing and displaying the image notifying the operation mode when stopping the variable display in the slot machine on the special layer by the normal drawing process instead of the specific drawing process. can be appropriately ensured, various display performances can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 01AK)
The present embodiment includes the following inventions. That is, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of executing a game, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-171129, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, an effect image is displayed according to the instruction of the display list. , and technology for game machines that draws a processed image in which multiple deformed images generated using a reversed image are arranged, such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29947. was also proposed. In the game machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, there is a possibility that the visibility of important images may deteriorate due to the change of the entire image. Therefore, with the aim of providing a game machine that enhances the enjoyment of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image,
The game machine related to the characteristic part 01AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. An image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, for example, the image processing means performs normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to drawing commands for normal display, for example, drawing corresponding to image data, Specific drawing processing such as drawing processing corresponding to drawing commands for effects, for example, drawing by changing color information included in at least image data, can be executed. An image in each layer can be displayed, and the plurality of layers includes specific layers such as layers AKL03 to AKL05, and special layers having a higher priority than the specific layers, such as layers AKL01 and AKL02. In steps 01AKS01 to 01AKS03, the specific layer is drawn by a specific drawing process to display an image for effect. A predetermined image can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data, to appropriately ensure the visibility of the image, and to make it possible to execute a variety of display effects, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific rendering process may be performed using a smaller number of colors than the color information contained in the image data (for example, monochrome conversion), such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific drawing process may convert the value of the color information included in the image data and draw (for example, color information reversal), such as color information reversal. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

For example, as in production control example 02AKC01, for example, a first period (for example, production execution period D1) in which specific drawing processing such as production execution period D1 is not executed, and a second period in which specific drawing processing such as production execution period D2 is executed. In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light, and in the second period, the light emitting means may not emit light. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, for example, a first period during which specific drawing processing is not executed, such as effect execution period D1 (for example, effect execution period D1), and a second period during which specific drawing processing is executed, such as effect execution period D2 (for example, effect execution period D2) etc.), the light emitting means can emit light in the normal mode during the first period, and the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted more than in the normal mode during the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6), such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change processing S6A) is provided, and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode. Suggestive effects (eg, effects according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may not be displayed as an image to be displayed by the set suggestive effects. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, set value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., values from 1 to 6), such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change processing S6A) is provided, and a suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying a specific mode. An effect (for example, an effect according to the effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12) can be executed, and an image drawn by a specific drawing process may be displayed as an image displayed by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

For example, it may be possible to execute a specific drawing effect (for example, a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02) such as a specific drawing effect by drawing effect pattern 02AKA02, in which an image is paused and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, as in production examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28, the specific layer may alternately display an image drawn using image data and a monochrome image (for example, see production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28). As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

For example, variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, Variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in 5R), and reduction in a form smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1 Variable display of the identification information image (for example, variable display of small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1) can be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the identification information image is drawn and displayed by a specific drawing process. It is possible, and the reduced identification information image may be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 02AK)
The game machine related to the characteristic part 02AK is a game machine capable of executing a game, such as the pachinko game machine 1. Equipped with an image processing means such as VDP91AK132 capable of executing drawing processing, and specific effects such as super ready-to-win effects suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state. can be executed during variable display, and the effect pattern of the specific effect differs in the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state, for example, a first pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA01 and a second pattern such as drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. At least in the first period, such as the effect execution period D1, among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, regardless of whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern, for example, during the normal drawing effect It is possible to display an image drawn by normal drawing processing such as drawing processing in response to the drawing command of , and among the effect periods in which the specific effect is executed, the second period, such as the effect execution period D2, after the first period, for example In the second period, an image drawn by normal drawing processing can be displayed in the case of the first pattern, and in the case of the second pattern, specific drawing processing such as drawing processing according to a drawing command during a specific drawing effect is performed. It is possible to display an image drawn by As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to appropriately raise the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the interest in the game while enabling the execution of various display effects.

The specific drawing process may be drawn with fewer colors than the color information contained in the image data, such as monochrome conversion. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

The specific rendering process may be rendered by converting the value of color information included in the image data, such as reversing color information. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute effects by means of various displays, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

For example, as in the effect control example 02AKC01, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect by means of the light emitting means in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, and to display the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect. Correspondingly, the light emission effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Alternatively, in response to the display of the image drawn by the normal drawing process in the specific effect, the lighting effect by the light emitting means can be executed in a normal mode, and in response to the display of the image drawn by the specific drawing process in the specific effect, You may restrict|limit light emission production|presentation rather than a normal aspect. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

A setting means such as a CPU 103 that executes a set value change process S6A, for example, which can be set to one of a plurality of set values such as values from 1 to 6, which has different advantages for the player, Suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed by displaying in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and the image displayed by the setting suggestion effect is drawn by a specific drawing process. It is also possible not to display the image that is displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

Setting means, such as the CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing S6A, which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, such as values from 1 to 6, which have different advantages for the player, are provided. Suggestion regarding means setting is performed by display in a specific mode, for example, setting suggestion effect such as effect execution examples 60AKD8 to 60AKD12 can be executed, and the image displayed by setting suggestion effect is drawn by specific drawing processing. It may be possible to display an image. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

In the second period, it may be possible to execute an effect of pausing and displaying an image in the case of the second pattern, such as a specific drawing effect by the drawing effect pattern 02AKA02. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the second period, it may be possible to alternately display an image drawn using the image data and a monochromatic image in the case of the second pattern, such as production execution examples 02AKM21 to 02AKM28. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the data volume and to make it possible to execute various display effects, thereby improving the interest in the game.

For example, variable display of the identification information image, such as variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and small patterns in the small pattern display area 01AKC1, for example. It is possible to perform variable display of a reduced identification information image in a form that is smaller than the identification information image, such as variable display of the identification information image. For example, as shown in FIG. It can be drawn and displayed, and the reduced identification information image can be drawn and displayed by normal drawing processing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by making it possible to execute various display effects while appropriately ensuring the visibility of the image.

The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 01AK and 02AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK and the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect in a suggestive effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component, or add a character image using data related to a common character image to the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image In the specific layer, the specific drawing process is used to draw the effect image, and the special layer, which has a higher priority than the specific layer, is drawn by the normal drawing process, It may be possible to display a predetermined image related to the progress of the game, and in the second period after the first period, it is possible to display an image drawn by the normal drawing process in the case of the first pattern, It may be possible to display an image drawn by the specific drawing process in the case of the second pattern in which the rate of control to be in an advantageous state is different from that of the first pattern.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 75SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-26. FIG. 10-1 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-3 is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 75SG. FIG. 10-4 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10-3. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions as seen from the player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001. In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same parts as in the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 includes a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board 2) forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame 3 (which supports and fixes the game board 2). (also referred to as an underframe 3). A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. In addition, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided in the game machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

The game board 2 is made of transparent (transparent) synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. , a guide rail 211, an outer rail decoration 212, and the like, and a spacer member 201 integrally attached to the back side of the board plate 200. As shown in FIG. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

An opening 2c is formed in the board surface plate 200 and the spacer member 201 of the game board 2, and the display area of the image display device 5 provided at a position away from the game board 2 on the back side is viewed through the opening 2c to the player side. It can be visually recognized from (the front side). In addition, an area overlapping the board 200 in the display area of the image display device 5 is visible through the board 200 .

A center decorative frame 51 is attached to the opening 2c of the board 200, and the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51, the guide rail 211 and the outer rail decoration 212 serves as the game ball flowing-down area in the game area Y. It is A light guide plate device 500, which will be described later, is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c surrounded by the center decorative frame 51. As shown in FIG.

A first effect unit 300 is provided at a lower position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at a position below the image display device 5 . A second effect unit 400 is provided on the right side of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, at a position corresponding to the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 . A third effect unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the area surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 , that is, the upper portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . A fourth effect unit 800 is provided at the upper left position on the back side of the board 200 , that is, at the upper left position of the image display device 5 . In addition, a variable winning ball unit 700 in which a game ball flowing down the game area Y can win a prize is provided at the right lower position of the board plate 200 .

Since the first effect unit 300 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided on the back side of the board 200, they are visible from the player side (the front side of the pachinko game machine 75SG001) through the board 200. ing. On the other hand, at least the front surfaces of the second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 are positioned in front of the game board surface, which is the front surface of the board surface plate 200, and are arranged in the opening 2c, thereby providing a light guide plate device. The light guide plate 501 of 500 is visible from the player side.

(Light guide plate device 500)
Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a front view showing the light guide plate device. 10-6, (A) is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a cross-sectional view along line BB of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing the main part of (B). is. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the light-emitting regions 506 are indicated by dots (halftone dots), and the non-light-emitting regions 507 without dots (halftone dots) are indicated by white.

As shown in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the region surrounded by the center decorative frame 51 except for the right and lower regions; An LED substrate 503 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 for making light incident on the right end surface 501 a of the light guide plate 501 is mounted, and a concentrator for concentrating the light from the light guide plate LEDs 502 toward the right end surface 501 a of the light guide plate 501 . and an optical lens 504 . The light guide plate device 500 is supported by a base member (not shown) fixed to the back surface of the game board 2 and the center decorative frame 51 .

The light guide plate 501 is a plate member made of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-to-rear width dimension (plate thickness=approximately 5 mm). It is arranged in front of the third effect unit 600 and close to the glass window 50a.

Further, the light guide plate 501 has a light emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting forward and emitting light from the light guide plate LED 502 entering from the right end surface 501a and emitting from the front surface. , a light emitting area (see halftone dot areas in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)) that emits light by the light that enters from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a light emitting area that emits light from the right end surface 501a. A non-light-emitting region 507 as a second region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emitting it from the front surface, that is, does not emit light by the light incident inside the light guide plate 501 . and a non-light-emitting region (see white regions in FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6(A)).

The light emitting region 506 is formed so that a figure with a radial peripheral edge appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light forward. By emitting the light, a predetermined image is displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 501 .

As shown in FIGS. 10-6B and 10-6C, the light-emitting region 506 has a fine uneven state so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501a and emit it from the front surface. (rough surface) is formed on the back side. Specifically, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch when viewed from the side in the direction in which light travels. In FIG. 10-6(C), the uneven state (rough surface) is shown in an enlarged manner to aid understanding, but the actual light emitting region 506 is a microscopic surface that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in an uneven state.

When light enters the inside from the right end surface 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by means of a dot pattern consisting of a plurality of concave portions 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (Fig. See halftone dot area at 10-5). That is, the light-emitting region 506 as a first region forming a predetermined light-guiding pattern in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that enters from the right end surface 501 a is reflected forward and emitted from the front surface is formed from the plurality of concave portions 510 . This is an area where a dot pattern is formed, and a non- A light emitting region 507 is a region where a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the characteristic portion 75SG, a predetermined image (graphic) is exemplified as display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to these, decorations such as pictures, characters, symbols, patterns, or patterns are also possible. Other display information including information may be displayed.

When light is not incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end face 501a, the light guide plate 501 as a whole including the light emitting region 506 is in a colorless and transparent state. The second effect unit 400 and the third effect unit 600 can be visually recognized (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501 . Further, when light is incident from the right end surface 501a, the portion of the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the light emitting region 506 is formed in a substantially semicircular uneven state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured by a molding method in which an uneven portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501 . In addition, the reflective part is configured by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with dot-shaped adhesive material, and a groove processing method. can be

In the characteristic portion 75SG, the shape of each unevenness of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially semicircular in cross-sectional view, but the present invention is not limited to this. The cross-sectional shape of each unevenness of the light-emitting region 506 can be variously modified, such as a substantially triangular shape, as long as it constitutes a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface).

The condensing lens 504 is formed in the shape of a long plate extending vertically from a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. A plurality of semicircular projections 504A that protrude toward the light guide plate 501 in a front view are continuously formed in the vertical direction on the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side. The condenser lens 504 is composed of a single member integrally provided with a plurality of convex portions 504A. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502 .

The convex portions 504A are not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LEDs 502, and one convex portion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502, for example. Further, the condenser lens 504 is not limited to being composed of a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are integrally provided, and a plurality of condenser lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LEDs 502 may be used. may be used.

As shown in FIG. 10-6C, the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, since the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. light (without light leakage) into the light guide plate 501 .

The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side. It is a flat inclined surface that gradually inclines forward toward the 501 side. That is, the condensing lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness is gradually reduced from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side.

Also, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 . For example, the gap is of such a size that the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even if vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001. As a result, it is possible to prevent the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibrations that occur during transportation and use of the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

Next, the light guide state of the emitted light from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. Emitted light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 enters a condenser lens 504 . Here, since the incident surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape to form a lens surface, even if the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 has a high directivity, it is incident on the condenser lens 504. The emitted light is radially diffused in the horizontal direction within the condensing lens 504 . Light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted rightward and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

As a result, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be radially diffused to some extent by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area of the light guide plate 501 can be expanded. can be expanded. In addition, since the light emitted from the condensing lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (because it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portions corresponding to the respective light guide plate LEDs 502 can emit light. Further, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total reflection in the front-rear direction. The light is emitted from the end surface on the 501 side (the portion with the smallest front-to-rear width).

With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 side of the condenser lens 504, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. 501, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from diffusing to the surroundings.

Light from the condensing lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, whereupon the light is reflected toward the front side (player's side). As a result, when viewed from the player, the light-emitting area 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by the reflected light, so that the area indicated by halftone dots in FIG. , the figure will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, the image display device 5 is arranged at the back and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged at the front when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction). As seen from the player, the image display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal panel. The image display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

(First production unit 300)
Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-12. 10-7, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10-8 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the first effect unit as viewed obliquely from the front. 10-9, (A) is a CC sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), (B) is a DD sectional view of FIG. 10-7 (A), and (C) is FIG. 10-7 It is a cross-sectional view along EE of (A). 10-10, (A) is a front view showing the base member, (B) is a front view showing the LED substrate, and (C) is a front view showing the cover member. 10-11, (A) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member removed, and (B) is a front view showing the first effect unit with the cover member attached. FIG. 10-12 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 10-11(B).

As shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, the first effect unit 300 is arranged to cover the base member 301 and the front side of the base member 301, and is attached to the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N1. and an LED board 303 attached to the front surface of the base member 301 with a plurality of screws N2. It is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board plate 200 .

The base member 301 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is oblong in a front view, and has black surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surfaces). The front surface of the base member 301 includes a flat portion 311 formed of a flat surface, a concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the flat portion 311 and shaped like a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and rear wall portions 313A to 313A located slightly behind the flat portion 311. 313D and

Above the flat portion 311, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 314A to 314E forming part of a decorative pattern 331, which will be described later, are formed in the longitudinal direction. Parts 313A to 313D are visible. Incidentally, the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are formed so as to incline rearward upward (see FIG. 10-9(B)). A predetermined decorative pattern 341 is engraved on the front surfaces of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the concave portion 312 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, has a depth capable of accommodating the LED substrate 303, and is formed so as to be surrounded by the flat portion 311 when viewed from the front. ing. In the state where the LED board 303 is attached, the front surface of the LED board 303 and the flat portion 311 are substantially flush with each other, and only the first effect LEDs 304, which will be described later, are positioned forward of the flat portion 311. there is In addition, the concave portion 312 is formed with a plurality of vertically elongated heat radiation holes 315 and an opening 316 for routing a cable (not shown) connected to the LED substrate 303 to the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9, on the front surface of the LED board 303, a plurality of first effect LEDs 304 capable of irradiating light forward and a plurality of other electronic components (not shown) are mounted. A plurality of printed wirings 320 are formed (see the enlarged view of FIG. 10-10(B)). On the back side of the LED board 303, a board-side connector CN for connecting a cable (not shown) to the LED board 303 and electronic parts (not shown) are mounted. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 303 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring 320 on the front and back surfaces) is black.

The cover member 302 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a horizontally long shape when viewed from the front. It has second translucent portions 322A and 322B mainly corresponding to the first effect LED 304 . At positions corresponding to the projections 314A to 314E of the base member 301, a plurality of trapezoidal projections 324A to 324E are formed in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the front surfaces of the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B protrude forward from the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321, and a recess 322D is formed on the back surface. The first production LED 304 can be accommodated. In addition, a light diffusing portion 322C composed of fine uneven portions is formed on the back surface of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B, so that the light from the rear first effect LED 304 can be diffused and emitted forward. ing. Incidentally, the concave and convex portions may be formed by, for example, sandblasting, diamond cutting, etc., and the forming method, shape, etc. can be variously changed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(C), the first translucent portion 321 is provided with a plurality of decoration patterns 331 having a hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, one decorative pattern 331 has a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, with a decorative portion 331A formed of a plurality of horizontal lines extending in the left-right direction and decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines extending in oblique left and right directions. A decorative portion 331D and a decorative portion 331E having a triangular shape when viewed from the front are provided, and a plurality of decorative patterns 331 are continuously provided by sharing the decorative portions 331A to 331C with adjacent decorative patterns 331. .

Further, each of these decorative portions 331A to 331E is formed by, for example, sandblasting the rear surface (or front surface) of the cover member 302 to form fine irregularities, or by attaching a translucent seal or the like. As a result, each decorative portion 331A to 331E looks milky white or translucent when viewed from the player's side.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the LED board 303 as an electronic component having the first effect LED 304 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, and the front side is covered with the cover member 302. ing. However, since the cover member 302 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, it is possible for the player to see the base member 301 and the front surface of the LED board 303 through the cover member 302 . be.

Here, by arranging the same black base member 301 around (periphery) the black LED substrate 303, the LED substrate 303 assimilates with the surrounding base member 301, and the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 are integrated. It is difficult to understand the boundary portion BD between and. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 303 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 301, so that the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), when the cover member 302 is attached to the front side of the base member 301 with the LED substrate 303 arranged in the concave portion 312 of the base member 301, the base member 301 and the LED substrate are mounted. The cover member 302 is positioned high so as to cover the front surface of the base member 303, and the front surface of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 can be easily seen through the first translucent portion 321 from the player side. As for the first effect LED 304, it is difficult for the player to see through the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. The milky-white or semi-transparent decorative portions 331A to 331E applied to the cover member 302 are arranged on the front side of the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303, so that the milky-white or semi-transparent color appears on the front side of the black background. The decorative pattern 331 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the cover member 302 is arranged on the front side of the base member 301, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 (for example, the decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIG. 10-12). etc.) are formed (provided) so as to straddle the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. Specifically, the decorative portions 331B and 331C formed of inclined lines are arranged so as to intersect the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 facing in the left-right direction, and one decorative pattern 331 is formed between two members (LED Since one decorative pattern 331 is provided across the substrate 303 and the cover member 302), it looks as if one decoration pattern 331 is provided on one member, so that the LED substrate 303 and the cover member 302 on the back side thereof can be seen. It becomes difficult to recognize that is a separate member.

Further, part of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 is difficult to see from the player side due to the overlapping decoration parts 331B and 331C on the front side, so the LED board 303 becomes less noticeable. Since the decorative portions 331B and 331C are linear, even if they are arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the boundary portion BD, the area overlapping the boundary portion BD is small, but the decorative pattern 331 does not overlap the LED substrate 303 and the cover. It is difficult to recognize that the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 are separate members because they are formed over substantially the entire front surface of the member 302 .

Further, the decorative portion 331A of each decorative pattern 331 is arranged substantially parallel to the boundary portion BD, and is similar in appearance to the boundary portion BD, making it difficult to distinguish between them. In addition, the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous because milky white, which has a higher brightness than black, is conspicuous. By arranging the decoration portion 331A so as to overlap along the boundary portion BD, the decoration portion 331A may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, these decorative portions 331A to 331C are formed in a linear shape in the same manner as the printed wiring 320 provided on the LED substrate 303, and are arranged substantially parallel to a part of the printed wiring 320, so that the printed wiring Since the wiring pattern of 320 is similar (or common) in appearance, it is difficult to distinguish between them, so that the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Furthermore, although the decorative portions 331D and 331E are different from the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, they are thicker and have a larger area than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD, and are more conspicuous than the printed wiring 320 and the boundary portion BD. In addition, since the printed wiring 320 is partially overlapped on the front side of the printed wiring 320, the printed wiring 320 becomes difficult to see, so that the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, on the front surface of each of the rear wall portions 313A to 313D of the base member 301, a decorative pattern 341 consisting of vertically flattened hexagonal linear protrusions is provided so as to be visible from the player side. Since the decorative pattern 341 is similar (or common) to the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320, even in the region of the base member 301 not covered with the cover member 302, the wiring pattern of the printed wiring 320 is similar to the wiring pattern. Since the decorative pattern 341 can be formed, the LED substrate 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, the base member 301 has rear wall portions 313A to 313D as predetermined areas visible from the player side without seeing through the cover member 302, and the rear wall portions 313A to 313D are provided on the cover member 302. Since the decorative pattern 341 as the predetermined decorative pattern having the same or similar form as the decorative pattern 331 provided is provided, it becomes difficult to recognize that the base member 301 and the cover member 302 are different members. 303 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, since the LED substrate 303 is arranged in the concave portion 312 formed in the lower portion of the base member 301, the LED substrate 303 is located below the upper region of the concave portion 312 in the base member 301, that is, at a position spaced apart from the image display device 5. By being provided, it is located away from the image display device 5 which the player pays attention to, so that it is less conspicuous.

In this way, a predetermined decorative pattern 331 (for example, decorative patterns 331J to 331M in FIGS. 10-12) among the plurality of decorative patterns 331 is attached to the LED board 303 and the cover member 302 when viewed from the player side. By being provided so as to straddle, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 303, which should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side or the like where the player can see them. can increase

(Variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the variable winning ball unit 700 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13, (A) is a front view showing the variable winning ball unit, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF of (A).

As shown in FIGS. 10-13, the variable winning ball unit 700 has a base member 701 attached to the board 200 from the front side, and a cover member 702 provided on the front side of the base member 701. The device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are integrated as a unit.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided on the upper right of the variable winning ball unit 700, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the lower left. In between, there are a game ball path 705A that allows a game ball (game ball P) to enter the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7, and a game ball (game ball) to the second start winning opening of the variable winning ball device 6B A game ball path 705B into which P) can enter is provided. Further, below the special variable winning ball device 7, an LED board 703 having a plurality of performance LEDs 704 capable of irradiating light forward is provided.

The base member 701 and the cover member 702 are made of a translucent synthetic resin material. Therefore, the game ball passing through the game ball paths 705A and 705B can be viewed through the cover plate 702A from the player side.

(First effect unit 300 and variable winning ball unit 700)
Next, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-16. 10-14, (A) and (B) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the first effect unit, and (C) and (D) are cross-sectional views showing essential parts of the variable winning ball unit. 10-15 are diagrams for comparing the first effect unit and the variable winning ball unit. 10 to 16 are diagrams for explaining similar colors.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 are arranged side by side on the left and right below the image display device 5. The right end of the 1 effect unit 300 is provided so as to overlap or approach the left end of the variable winning ball unit 700 . 10-4 and 10-13(B), the front portion of the variable winning ball unit 700 is arranged on the front side of the board 200, while the first effect unit 300 is positioned on the board 200. located on the back side of the

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(A) and (B), the front-rear dimension L1A, which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in the first translucent portion 321 of the first effect unit 300, is the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. is longer than the front-rear dimension L1B which is the plate thickness dimension of the cover member 302 in (L1A>L1B).

In the first light-transmitting portion 321 of the cover member 302, the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction out of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface of the first light-transmitting portion 321 (T direction) is XA. %. In addition, in the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302, out of the light that has entered from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surfaces of the second light transmitting portions 322A and 322B (T direction), the light is transmitted in the T direction. The light transmittance is XB%. In other words, not all of the light (100%) entering the first light-transmitting portion 321 and the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B from the front is transmitted in the T direction, and part of the light is reflected on the front surface. , is emitted in a direction different from the T direction (so as to spread to the surroundings) at the rear. In particular, the second light-transmitting portions 322A and 322B have the light diffusing portion 322C made up of uneven portions formed on the back surface, so that light can be transmitted in a direction different from the T direction more easily than the first light-transmitting portion 321. , the transmittance of light in the T direction is lower than the transmittance of the first light transmitting portion 321 (light transmittance is low: XA%>XB%).

As shown in FIGS. 10-14(C) and 10-14(D), in the cover plate 702A, of the light entering from the front in the direction perpendicular to the front surface (T direction), the transmittance of the light transmitted in the T direction is Y %. Here, the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A is shorter than the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the first translucent portion 321 and the second translucent portions 322A and 322B of the cover member 302 (L2<L1A, L2<L1B), the light incident from the front surface is guided in the T direction inside and is difficult to diffuse to the surroundings before being emitted from the rear surface, and there is no light diffusion portion like the second translucent portions 322A and 322B. Since it is a flat plate, the light transmittance of the cover plate 702A in the T direction is higher than the light transmittance of the cover member 302 in the T direction (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%).

In other words, the translucency of the cover member 302 is lower than that of the cover plate 702A. Rather than visually recognizing the ball P), the case of visually recognizing a predetermined portion (for example, the first effect LED 304 or the LED board 303) on the back side of the cover member 302 through the cover member 302 from the player side. is low in visibility, the LED board 303 including the first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, becomes inconspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-15, in the first effect unit 300, an LED board 303 including a first effect LED 304, which is an electronic component, and a base member 301 arranged therearound are of the same color (black). , the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous. Also, the front-rear dimensions L1A and L1B of the cover member 302 of the first effect unit 300 are longer than the front-rear dimension L2 of the cover plate 702A of the variable winning ball unit 700 (L1A, L1B>L2), and the first effect unit The light transmittance (XA%, XA%) of the cover member 302 of 300 in the T direction is lower than the light transmittance (Y%) of the cover member 702 of the variable winning ball unit 700 in the T direction. (Y%>XA%, Y%>XB%), and the LED substrate 303 is less conspicuous.

Therefore, when the first effect unit 300 and the variable winning ball unit 700 provided at a different position (on the right side) from the first effect unit 300 are viewed from the player side, the cover member 702 is seen through. Since the visibility when the LED board 303 is viewed through the cover member 302 is lower than the visibility when the game ball P is viewed, the variable winning ball unit 700 in the vicinity of the first effect unit 300 , the LED substrate 303 arranged on the back side of the cover member 302, which is a translucent member, feels more difficult to see. In addition, since the cover member 302 is arranged on the back side of the cover plate 702A and the base member 301 and the LED substrate 303 are dark black, the LED substrate 303 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the present embodiment, the LED board 303, which is an electronic component, and the base member 301, which is a specific member arranged around it, are of the same color (black). The color is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member may not have the same color. For example, they may have the same color or a similar color.

Color has three attributes: hue (color), lightness (brightness), and saturation (vividness). 1. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue; 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones; Color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation are included.

Fig. 10-16 shows an example of "1. Combination of colors (neighboring colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and are adjacent in terms of hue". If the three primary colors of the colorants, cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y), are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a color wheel of a predetermined number (here, 24 colors), Each of the three colors is dissimilar to each other. Colors having a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue circle are "similar colors", and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors adjacent to each other on the hue circle.

For example, when cyan (C) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar to cyan (C). When magenta (M) is used as a reference color, colors that fall within the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to magenta (M), and yellow ( When Y) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the cyan (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to yellow (Y). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors having a hue difference in the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel may be defined as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow that give a feeling of warmth, cold colors that give a feeling of coldness such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It preferably includes a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors positioned between warm and cool colors.

(Second production unit 400)
Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-17 to 10-19. 10-17, (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a front view showing the second effect unit with the cover member removed. 10-18, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 10-17(A), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 10-17(A). 10-19, (A) is a diagram explaining the boundary between the base member and the LED board, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the second effect unit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-17 and 10-18, the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401, a cover member 402 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 401, and a front surface of the base member 401. and an inner lens 405 arranged on the front side of the LED board 403. As shown in FIG. , that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001 through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501.

The base member 401 is formed of a non-translucent synthetic resin material in a substantially half-moon shape when viewed from the front, and has white surfaces (front, rear, and peripheral surfaces).

The LED board 403 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss projecting from the front surface of the base member 401 . A plurality of second effect LEDs 404A and 404B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 403 . Further, on the back surface of the LED board 403, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404C capable of emitting light upward, a plurality of second effect LEDs 404D capable of emitting light downward, and other electronic components (illustrated ) are installed multiple times. The second effect LEDs 404A to 404D are angle type LEDs capable of irradiating light parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 403 . In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 403 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 405 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 403, and includes a plurality of second effect LEDs 404A arranged along the upper side of the front surface of the LED substrate 403, It is arranged between a plurality of second effect LEDs 404B arranged along the lower side on the front surface of the LED board 403, the light from the second effect LED 404A is incident on the front end surface, and the light from the second effect LED 404B of light is incident on the rear end face.

As shown in FIG. 10-18(A), on the back surface of the inner lens 405, the light incident from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 406 for reflecting the light forward. , and is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 405 . Since the front surface of the inner lens 405 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The reflecting portion 406 is formed in an uneven state (rough surface) such that a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction of the light guided inside the inner lens 405 has a substantially triangular wave shape with a constant pitch. Specifically, it is configured by a molding method in which uneven portions are formed on the back surface of the inner lens 405 by stamper or injection. A sticking dot method in which the plate is attached with a dot-like adhesive material, or a groove processing method may be used to configure the reflecting portion.

The cover member 402 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 . At a position corresponding to the LED board 403 on the front surface of the cover member 402, a protrusion 410 having a shape slightly enlarging the LED board 403 in a front view is projected forward.

On the front surface of the convex portion 410, a decorative portion 420 consisting of a letter “V” (logotype) is printed with a colored paint having translucency, or a translucent sheet on which letters are printed is adhered. For example, it is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 402A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the convex portion 410 so that the light from the inner lens 405 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In a region above the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421A protruding to the back side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404C. In addition, in a region below the convex portion 410 on the back surface of the cover member 402, a plurality of convex streak portions 421B protruding to the rear side extend vertically at positions corresponding to the respective second effect LEDs 404D. A light diffusing portion made up of an uneven portion may also be formed on a portion of the rear surface of the cover member 402 where the protruding portions 421A and 421B are not formed. Further, the cover member 402 is formed so as to incline rearward from the projection 410 upward and downward.

The plurality of ridges 421A and 421B has an uneven portion continuously formed on the rear end surface, and a stepped portion 421C is formed at an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction. By extending so as to be inclined to the rear side, the light emitted upward and downward from the second effect LEDs 404C and 404D can enter from these concave and convex portions and the stepped portion 421C. The emitted light is diffused by the concave-convex portion and emitted forward.

In this way, the second effect unit 400 emits light from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B, and the light emitted from the second effect LEDs 404A and 404B is projected forward by the inner lens 405 and the cover member 402 is projected. By being incident on the region corresponding to the portion 410, the entire front surface of the convex portion 410 including the decorative portion 420 emits surface light.

As shown in FIG. 10-19(A), an LED board 403 as an electronic component having second effect LEDs 404A to 404D is arranged on the front side of the base member 401, and the front side is covered by the cover member 402. covered. However, since the cover member 402 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, it is assumed from the player's side that a light diffusion portion is formed in a portion of the cover member 402 other than the ridges 421A and 421B. However, it is possible to see the front surfaces of the base member 401 and the LED substrate 403 through the portions other than the protruding portions 421A and 421B.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-19(B), by arranging the same white base member 401 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 403, the LED substrate 403 and the surrounding base member 401 are arranged. As a result, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the cover member 402 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 403 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 401, so that the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-19(A), the decorative portion 420 provided on the front surface of the convex portion 410 is a boundary between the LED board 403, which is an electronic component, and the base member 401 when viewed from the player side. It is provided at a position corresponding to a part of the upper side and the lower side of the part BD. That is, a part of the decoration part 420 is arranged so as to overlap (overlap) a part of the boundary part BD on the front side of the boundary part BD. The LED board 403 becomes inconspicuous because it becomes difficult to see. Therefore, even electronic parts such as the LED board 403, which should not be shown to the player from the standpoint of appearance and design, can be provided on the front side, etc., visible from the player side. can increase

Moreover, the decorative portion 420 is provided so as to cover (overlap) the front side of the boundary portion BD in a larger area than the decorative pattern 331 described above. discreetly.

In the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 partially overlaps (overlaps) a position corresponding to part of the upper side and lower side of the boundary portion BD when viewed from the player side. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portions 420 may be arranged at positions corresponding to all portions of the boundary portion BD. In addition, it is preferable to provide so as to overlap about ⅓ or more of the boundary portion BD.

In addition, since the letter "V" is displayed as the logotype in the decorative portion 420, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the logotype and be conscious of the boundary portion BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the character "V" indicating a big hit is applied as a logotype is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and includes "big hit", "BONUS", "RUSH". , characters indicating a variable display result, characters indicating a big hit such as "heat", "hot heat", and "!!", characters such as the model name of the game machine, the title, and the name of the character appearing. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In addition, the LED board 403 has a second effect LED 404A as a light emitting means capable of causing the decoration part 420 to emit light, so that the decoration part 420 is conspicuous due to the light emission, so that the player can see the LED board 403 and the base member 401. Since it becomes difficult to be conscious of the boundary portion BD between and, the LED substrate 403 becomes less conspicuous.

In addition, the second effect LED 404A is provided so that the decorative portion 420 can emit surface light through the inner lens 405, so that the decorative portion 420 is conspicuous due to the surface light emission, so that the player can use the LED board 403. and the base member 401, the LED substrate 403 becomes less conspicuous.

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative portion 420 is exemplified as one decorative portion made of the letter “V”, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a plurality of decorative portions 420 are provided in the area of the cover member 402 and a plurality of predetermined decorative portions (for example, patterns) different from the decorative portion 420 are provided in a region other than the convex portion 410 of the cover member 402, the plurality of decorations The number of parts is preferably greater than the number of predetermined decorative parts. By doing so, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401 is made difficult to see by the plurality of decorative portions, and is more conspicuous than the plurality of predetermined decorative portions provided in other regions. Therefore, the LED substrate 403 becomes inconspicuous.

In this case, it is sufficient that the plurality of decorative portions and the plurality of predetermined decorative portions have different modes. Any one of color, size, etc. may be different.

Moreover, the cover member 402 includes a convex portion 410 that is a boundary corresponding region corresponding to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401, and a convex portion 410 that does not correspond to the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 403 and the base member 401. The translucency of the convex portion 410 may be lower than the translucency of the region other than the convex portion 410 . By doing so, the boundary part BD between the LED board 403 and the base member 401 becomes difficult for the player to see through the convex part 410 , so the LED board 403 becomes less conspicuous.

(Third production unit 600 and fourth production unit 800)
Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-20 to 10-26. 10-20 (A) is a front view showing the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. 10-21, (A) is a cross-sectional view along II in FIG. 10-20, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along JJ in FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-22 is a cross-sectional view along KK of FIG. 10-20. FIG. 10-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the visibility status of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing the configuration of the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit. FIG. 10-25 is a diagram showing an effect mode when the third effect unit and the fourth effect unit emit light. FIG. 10-26 is a schematic front view showing a state in which (A) the third effect unit is located at the origin position, and (B) a state in which the third effect unit is located at the effect position.

(Third production unit 600)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20, 10-21(A) and 10-26, the third effect unit 600 includes a base member 601 and a cover member arranged to cover the front side of the base member 601. 602, an LED board 603 attached to the front surface of the base member 601, and an inner lens 605 arranged on the front side of the LED board 603; ) and the performance position shown in FIG. and a power transmission member 632 for transmitting power to the light emitting effect part 630, and as shown in FIG. That is, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the light guide plate 501 from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 75SG001.

The base member 601 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front.

The LED board 603 has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of an upright wall projecting from the front peripheral edge of the base member 601 . A plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 603 . The third effect LEDs 604A and 604B are capable of emitting light forward. In addition, the surface of the LED substrate 603 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white. Incidentally, the cable C connecting the LED board 603 and the effect control board 12 is wired along the power transmission member 632 (see FIG. 10-26).

The inner lens 605 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the LED substrate 603. The plurality of third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged in front of the LED substrate 603 are viewed from the front side. arranged to cover.

As shown in FIG. 10-21(A), on the front and back of the inner lens 605, the light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B arranged on the back side is diffused and emitted forward. Surface light emission is achieved by providing the light diffusing portion 605A made up of uneven portions.

The cover member 602 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material and has a box shape with an open rear surface, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 601 and the LED substrate 603 .

On the front surface of the cover member 602, a decorative portion 620 consisting of characters (logotype) of "XXX" is printed with a colored paint having translucency, or a translucent sheet on which characters are printed is adhered. For example, it is provided so as to allow light to pass therethrough. A light diffusing portion 602A composed of an uneven portion is formed on the back surface of the cover member 602 so that the light from the inner lens 605 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the logo type is exemplified with the characters "XXX" indicating a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the model name of the gaming machine, title, appearance Characters such as character names, characters indicating variable display results such as "big hit", "BONUS", and "RUSH", and characters suggesting big hits such as "heat", "hot heat", and "!!" may be used. Furthermore, not only characters but also decorations such as characters, symbols, designs, pictures, and patterns may be displayed as decorations.

In this way, the third effect unit 600 emits light from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the light emitted forward from the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 is further emitted from the cover member 602. The light is diffused through and emitted forward, so that the entire front surface of the cover member 602 including the decorative portion 620 emits light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A are arranged along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decoration portion 620, and the plurality of third effect LEDs 604B are arranged along the periphery of the letters "XXX". It is arranged at a position that does not correspond to the portion 620 . By arranging the plurality of third effect LEDs 604A along the periphery of the characters "XXX" forming the decorative portion 620 in this way, when the third effect LEDs 604A emit light, "XXX" is displayed. Since the periphery of the character is lit up, the shape of the decorative portion 620 can be easily recognized.

In addition, the power transmission member 632, which constitutes a part of the power transmission member that transmits power to the light emission effect portion 630, has one end rotatably supported about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction, and the other end emits light. Although it is an arm member provided with the effect part 630, the power transmission member can be changed in various ways, and if it can transmit power so that the light emission effect part 630 can move in the vertical direction, it can be a rack gear and a pinion gear. There may be.

(Fourth production unit 800)
As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21 (B), the fourth effect unit 800 includes a base member 801, a cover member 802 arranged to cover the front side of the base member 801, a base member 801, and an inner lens 805 arranged on the front side of the LED board 803. As shown in FIG. In the upper left part, it is provided so as to be visible through the glass window 50a and the board 200 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001, that is, from the side of the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 75SG001.

The base member 801 is made of a non-translucent synthetic resin material and is shaped like a box with an open front surface. In addition, the surfaces (front and rear surfaces and peripheral surface) are white.

The LED board 803 is formed to be smaller than the base member 801 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front end of a boss (not shown) erected on the front surface of the base member 801 . A plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 and other electronic components (not shown) are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 803 . The fourth effect LEDs 804 are angle-type LEDs capable of emitting light in parallel or substantially parallel to the mounting surface of the LED board 803 , and are arranged along the periphery of the front surface of the LED board 803 . The surface of the LED substrate 803 (the insulating portion excluding the printed wiring on the front and back surfaces) is white.

The inner lens 805 is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, and is placed in a region surrounded by the plurality of fourth effect LEDs 804 on the front surface of the LED substrate 803 .

As shown in FIG. 10-21(B), on the back surface of the inner lens 805, the light incident from the fourth effect LED 804 is reflected forward by a reflecting portion 806 for reflecting forward, The light is emitted forward substantially uniformly from the entire front surface of the inner lens 805 . Since the front surface of the inner lens 805 is a flat surface, it emits surface light like a light guide plate.

The cover member 802 is made of a translucent (transparent) synthetic resin material, and is formed so as to be able to cover the front side of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 . More specifically, the cover member 802 does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801A along the guide rail 211 of the standing walls erected along the front peripheral edge of the base member 801, and does not cover the front end of the standing wall 801B other than the portion along the guide rail 211. It covers the front end. A light diffusing portion 802A is formed on the rear surface of the cover member 802, and is made up of an uneven portion, so that the light from the inner lens 805 can be diffused and emitted forward.

In this way, the fourth effect unit 800 emits light from the fourth effect LED 804 , and the light emitted forward from the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 further passes through the cover member 802 . By being diffused and emitted forward, the entire front surface of the cover member 802 emits surface light.

Next, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are described. As shown in FIG. 10-24, in the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800, the respective base members 601, 801 and LED substrates 603, 803 have the same white surface color. 801 and the front side of the LED substrates 603, 803 are covered with translucent cover members 602, 802, and the front side emits light when the third production LEDs 604A, 604B and the fourth production LED 804 are lit. It is

As shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(A), an LED board 603 as an electronic component having third effect LEDs 604A and 604B is arranged on the front side of the base member 601, and the front side thereof is the cover. It is covered by member 602 . However, since the cover member 602 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the light diffusion portion 602A is formed in the cover member 602, the player can see through the cover member 602. Although it is possible to visually recognize the back side, the inner lens 605 having the light diffusion portion 605A formed on the front and rear surfaces is provided on the back side so as to cover the LED substrate 603 from the front side. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the LED substrate 603, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize it.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(A), by arranging the standing wall of the same white base member 601 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 603, the LED substrate 603 is arranged on the surrounding base member. Assimilated with 601, the boundary BD between the LED substrate 603 and the cover member 602 is obscure. In other words, it becomes difficult to recognize that the LED board 603 is provided on the base member 601, so that the LED board 603, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 and 10-21(B), the LED board 803 as an electronic component having the fourth effect LED 804 is arranged on the front side of the base member 801, and the front side thereof is covered with a cover member 802 . However, since the cover member 802 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, even if the cover member 802 is provided with the light diffusing portion 802A, the player can see through the cover member 802. It is possible to visually recognize the front surface of the base member 801 and the LED substrate 803 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-21(B), by arranging the same white base member 801 around (periphery) the white LED substrate 803, the LED substrate 803 and the surrounding base member 801 are arranged. As a result, the boundary portion BD between the LED substrate 803 and the cover member 802 is obscured. In other words, it becomes difficult to see that the LED board 803 is provided on a part of the front surface of the base member 801, so that the LED board 803, which is an electronic component, becomes less noticeable.

However, the fourth effect LED 804 is an angle-type LED in which light is incident from the side end surface of the inner lens 805, and is arranged along the peripheral edge of the LED substrate 803, so that the LED including the fourth effect LED 804 The front side of the front peripheral edge of the substrate 803 is not covered with the inner lens 805, and the inner lens 805 has a smaller area than the inner lens 605 where the reflecting portion and the light diffusing portion are formed. The visibility when viewing the LED board 803 including the fourth effect LED 804 through the inner lens 805 from the side is the same as the LED board including the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B through the inner lens 605 from the player side. It is higher than the visibility when 603 is visually recognized. That is, the LED board 803 is more conspicuous than the LED board 603 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 10-20). ), and the arrangement position of the front surface in the front-rear direction is forward (player side) of the arrangement position of the front surface of the fourth effect unit 800 (see FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23). The light emission mode of the fourth effect LED 804 of the effect unit 800 is surface light emission, while the light emission mode of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of the third effect unit 600 is flashing (see FIG. 10-25). 10-25, the backgrounds of the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are shown in black for the convenience of explaining the light emission mode.

In this way, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, is positioned closer to the player, and emits strong light. Therefore, it is a rendering means having higher visibility than the fourth rendering unit 800 when viewed from the player's side. That is, in the vicinity of the fourth effect unit 800, the third effect unit 600, which is effect means having higher visibility when viewed from the player side than the fourth effect unit 800, is provided. Since the third effect unit 600 is more conspicuous than the 4 effect unit 800 and attracts the player's attention, the LED board 803, which is an electronic component of the fourth effect unit 800, is less conspicuous.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the light emitting effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 is larger than the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 when viewed from the player side, and is positioned close to the player, and , By emitting light with strong light, a mode configured as a rendering means having higher visibility than the LED substrate 803 and the base member 801 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third rendering The light emitting effect section 630 of the unit 600 is different from the LED board 803 of the fourth effect unit 800 in at least one of the size when viewed from the player side, the position with respect to the player, and the light emitting mode, thereby improving visibility. should be high.

In addition, the front surface of the light emission effect section 630 of the third effect unit 600 serving as effect means is colored with a color that is more visible than the surface color of the LED substrate 803, or a decorative part with a color that is highly visible is provided. Also, the visibility of the light emitting effect portion 630 may be easily enhanced by using the cover member 602 molded in a highly visible color. Further, the visibility of the light emission effect section 630 may be easily enhanced by the light emission mode (for example, lighting color, lighting mode, brightness, etc.) of the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B.

In addition, as the rendering means, a mode in which the light emitting rendering section 630 of the third rendering unit 600 capable of emitting light by the light emitting means and operable by the rendering motor 631 is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be light emitting means (such as a lamp portion) provided around the fourth effect unit 800 in the gaming machine frame 3, or effect means that does not emit light by the light emitting means, or may be driven by a predetermined drive source. It may be a production unit fixed at a predetermined position without operating.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-23, a protruding portion 3A (eaves portion) is formed in the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 3 so as to protrude forward beyond the game board 2 and the glass window 50a. The protruding part 3A is formed above the game area Y so as not to obstruct the visual recognition of the game ball passing over the upper part of the game area Y. When the game machine 75SG001 is installed on the game island of the game arcade, the area E1 (the area indicated by halftone dots in the drawing) below the projection 3A is shaded by the projection 3A blocking external light from the game arcade. It gets dark.

Therefore, the third effect unit 600 and the fourth effect unit 800 are provided at positions corresponding to the area E1 in the upper part of the game area Y, so that the LED boards 603 and 803 are easily lost in the shadow of the projecting part 3A. so it becomes less noticeable.

In addition, above the LED boards 603 and 803, a protrusion 3A is provided that protrudes toward the player side of the LED boards 603 and 803. The protrusion 3A is larger than the LED boards 603 and 803 ( 10-23), the LED boards 603 and 803 become inconspicuous because they are shadowed by the projecting portion 3A.

In addition, although the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601 and 801 are white, the present invention is not limited to this. By doing so, the LED substrates 603 and 803 and the base members 601 and 801 are more likely to be lost in the shadow of the protruding portion 3A, so that they are less conspicuous.

In this embodiment, as the projecting portion projecting toward the player side above the electronic components and the specific member, a projecting portion 3A projecting above the LED substrates 603 and 803 toward the player side is applied. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the projecting portion is not limited to a projecting portion protruding from a part of the game machine frame 3. For example, the game board 2 or the game machine It may be composed of other game devices (for example, a winning ball device, etc.) or a performance device provided in the region Y. FIG. In addition, the projecting part 3A is not only fixed on the front surface of the game machine frame 3, but also moves from the origin position to the projecting position at a predetermined timing, thereby allowing the player to move above the electronic parts and specific members. It may be a protruding part that protrudes to the side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-26, the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 corresponds to the movement of the light emitting effect section 630 and the power transmission member 632 of the third effect unit 600 operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501. It is formed so as to overlap in front and behind most of the moving region E2 (the region surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 10-26).

Specifically, the movement area E2 of the light emitting effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 is an area where the light emitting effect part 630 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and is an area including the origin position and the effect position. When light is incident on the light guide plate 501 from the right end surface 501a, the light emitting region 506 emits light. It becomes invisible or invisible through 501 . That is, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the light guide plate LED 502 to light up the light guide plate LED 502 at least during the movement period in which the light emission effect part 630 and the power transmission member 632 are moved from the origin position to the effect position and the effect period during which the light emission area is located. 506 to emit light, the light emission effect unit 630 and the power transmission member 632 become invisible or invisible through the light guide plate 501 from the player side, so power transmission is performed during the movement period and the effect period. It is possible to suppress conspicuousness of the cable C (electronic component) or the like provided along the member 632 .

Further, when the light guide plate LED 502 is turned off and the light emission effect of the light emitting area 506 is completed after the light emission effect part 630 moves to the effect position, the power transmission member 632, the cable C, etc. become visible, but the light emission effect part By lighting the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B of 630 to make the light emission effect part 630 stand out, the power transmission member 632 and the cable C can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the electronic components (for example, the LED board 603 and the cable C) operably provided in this manner are visible to the player during the waiting period of waiting at the origin position and the movement period. However, it is preferable to make it difficult or invisible from the player's side at least during the effect period in which it is positioned at the effect position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the electronic parts from becoming conspicuous during the presentation period in which the player pays attention.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 75SG001 of the characterizing portion 75SG of the present embodiment,
Electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) provided so as to be visible to the player;
a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in a color similar to that of the electronic component;
a light-transmitting member (e.g., cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) which is a light-transmitting member and is provided so that a player can visually recognize the electronic component and the specific member through the member;
It is characterized by having
By doing so, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the specific members of the similar color make the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased.
It should be noted that the electronic component and the specific member can be changed to arbitrary colors as long as they have similar colors. In addition, the electronic component and the specific member may be of the same color (for example, black and black, white and white, etc.) as in the above embodiment.

(Description on deformation and application of characteristic portion 75SG)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 75SG001 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

For example, in the characterizing portion 75SG of the above embodiment, light-emitting diodes such as the first effect LED 304, the second effect LEDs 404A to 404D, the third effect LEDs 604A and 604B, and the fourth effect LED 804 are provided as electronic components. Although the embodiment in which the LED boards 303, 403, 603, and 803 are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a circuit board (the main board 11 not (including control board 12, relay board, etc.);

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, as the specific member, the base member 301, 401, 601, 801 for arranging the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (apparatus) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated as described above, it may be a member provided around electronic components. If there is, a different member provided separately from the unit (device) that arranges or houses the electronic component (for example, a member that constitutes a part of another unit, or a part of the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3) a member constituting a part, etc.).

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 constituting a part of the unit (apparatus) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated is applied as the translucent member is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is not a member constituting a part of a unit (device) in which electronic components are arranged or accommodated as described above, it may be a member having translucency. If the member is provided so that the electronic component and the specific member can be visually recognized by the player through the member, a different member (for example, A member forming part of another unit, a member forming part of the game board 2 or the frame 3 for a game machine, etc.).

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as long as the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color as described above, the electronic component and the specific member are not limited to having the same color.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members partly overlap with the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components on the back side. , non-overlapping portions are arranged around the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be arranged side by side on at least one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side without partially overlapping when visually recognized. In addition, if the specific members are arranged around the electronic components when viewed from the player side, the electronic components and the specific members are arranged apart in the vertical, horizontal, front and rear directions, etc. may have been

In addition, the specific member provided around the electronic component includes the specific member provided at a position where the electronic component can be seen from the player side, for example, it is arranged within a range of about 5 cm away from the electronic component. A specific member may be included.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the cover members 302, 402, 602, and 802 made of a synthetic resin material having translucency is applied as the translucent member was exemplified. The material is not limited, and any material can be used as long as it is a member having translucency, such as a glass material. Further, the member may be transparent or translucent, or may be colored in a predetermined color, as long as the player can visually recognize the electronic parts and the specific member through the member. Also, the light transmittance may not be 100% or a value close to 100%.

Further, in the characteristic part 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as translucent members allow the player to see the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components through the members. and a part or all of the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least part of the electronic component provided that the electronic component and the specific member are visible together, even if at least part of the specific member is not made visible through the member. It is good if there is

In addition, in the characteristic portion 75SG of the above embodiment, the cover members 302, 402, 602, 802 as translucent members include the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 301 as specific members. 401, 601, and 801 are arranged along the electronic component and the specific member on the front side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electronic component and the specific member are not necessarily arranged along the electronic component and the specific member. It does not have to be. In other words, the electronic component or the specific member may be arranged obliquely with respect to the translucent member.

In addition, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above-described embodiment, the entire surfaces of the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 have a predetermined color (black or white). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the colors of the portions of the electronic component and the specific member that are visible through the translucent member (for example, the front color of the electronic component and the specific member) are similar colors. If so, the entire surface area does not necessarily have to be similar colors. In addition, the colors of these electronic components and specific members may be colored during molding of the members, may be colored by painting or printing after molding, or may be given a predetermined color by affixing a sticker or the like. may be

Further, in the characterizing part 75SG of the above embodiment, the electronic component and the specific member provided around the electronic component have the same color (the same color), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a predetermined electronic device that is provided in a manner that is difficult or invisible to the player separately from the LED substrates 303, 403, 603, 803 as electronic components and the base members 301, 401, 601, 801 as specific members. Components (for example, first start switch 22A, second start switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.) and predetermined members provided around the predetermined electronic components (for example, first start switch 22A, second member for fixing starting switch 22B, solenoids 81, 82, etc.). , and predetermined members (for example, members for fixing the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc.) are preferably of a different color.

In this way, the predetermined electronic parts such as the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B, the solenoids 81, 82, etc., which are provided so as to be difficult or invisible to the player, must be balanced with the predetermined members that fix them. Since general-purpose products can be used without considering

Further, by setting the color of the specific member to a color that has the same hue and has a higher lightness or saturation than the color of the electronic component, the specific member has higher visibility than the electronic component. It is possible to make the electronic components relatively inconspicuous.

In addition, by coloring the light-transmitting member with the same color as the electronic component and the specific member, the light-transmitting member is assimilated with the electronic component and the specific member, so that the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Also, for example, when electronic components such as a black LED board are arranged on the right side of the game board 2, the electronic components are provided on the left side of the game board 2 on the opposite side of the image display device 5, around the electronic components. Separately from the specific member, by providing the outer rail decoration 212 of the same color or similar color to the electronic component so as to be visible to the player, the black members are arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5 in a well-balanced manner. As a result, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort, and the electronic parts can be made less conspicuous. In this way, by symmetrically arranging a member having the same color as the electronic component or a similar color to the electronic component separately from the specific member, the electronic component can be made less conspicuous.

Further, the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 75SG may be appropriately combined with some or all of the configurations regarding the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK. For example, when the effects described in the characteristic portions 91AK, 92AK, 01AK, and 02AK can be executed in the image display device 5, the first effect unit 300 described in the characteristic portion 75SG provided around the image display device 5 , the second effect unit 400, the third effect unit 600, and the fourth effect unit 800 become inconspicuous, so that the effect can be favorably displayed.

Specifically, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the normal drawing effect NOR is executed even during periods other than the effect execution period D0 among the plurality of effect execution periods D0 to D4. In this case, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the first light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 or other decorative LEDs, and the light emitting effect is executed when executing the specific drawing effect SPE in the effect execution period D2 or the like. In the case of controlling not to be done, electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803) and specific members (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) around (for example, game effect lamp 9 , etc.) may be controlled so as not to be executed (or the amount of light is made lower than the amount of light of the game effect lamp 9, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to prevent electronic parts and specific members from being conspicuous by executing the light emission effect using the second light emitting member when the light emission effect using the first light emitting member is restricted. can.

In addition, among the second light-emitting members provided around the electronic component and the specific member, the decorative portion 420 of the light-transmitting member arranged on the front side of the electronic component and the specific member can emit surface light. For a light-emitting member such as the LED 404A that is inconspicuous even if it continues to emit light, the amount of light may be maintained (the execution may not be restricted) even when controlling so as not to execute the light-emitting effect using the first light-emitting member. . By doing so, it is possible to make the electronic parts and the specific members inconspicuous without excessively lowering the presentation effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1, 75SG001 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the gaming machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is added. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which is stored after being subtracted. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, there is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 75SG001) capable of playing a game, in which electronic components (for example, LED boards 303, 403, 603, 803), a specific member (for example, base members 301, 401, 601, 801) provided around the electronic component and formed in the same color as the electronic component, and a translucent member. A light-transmitting member (for example, cover members 302, 402, 602, 802) provided so that the player can see the electronic parts and the specific member through the member, and a display means (for example, an image display device) 5), wherein the translucent member (for example, the cover member 302) is formed to straddle the electronic component (for example, the LED board 303) and the specific member (for example, the base member 301) It has a pattern (eg, decorative pattern 331) (see FIGS. 10-12), and the electronic component (eg, LED board 303) is further away from the display means than the specific member (eg, upper part of base member 301) Further, a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P) and a payout section (eg, payout device 200) and a guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide) that forms a guide passage (e.g., first guide passage or second guide passage) that guides the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion, the upper surface of which is open. passage forming portion 202 and second guide passage forming portion 204), and cover portions (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, second cover body 310, second cover body 320, second 3 cover body 330), in which the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion are restricted from falling into the guide passage forming portion. A predetermined restricting portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) is provided (see FIGS. 30 and 32), and the guide passage forming portion is provided with a screw that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion. A game machine is provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting movement of members to the payout portion (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 35).

According to such a configuration, even if the electronic parts are arranged so as to be visible to the player, the decorative pattern makes the electronic parts inconspicuous, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. In addition, the electronic parts are located away from the display means that the player pays attention to, so they are less conspicuous. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

In other words, it is possible to make a game machine with a good appearance by increasing the degree of freedom in design, and to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guiding passage forming part or the payout part. be able to. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that looks good and is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade.

Furthermore, as an example of a game machine that can increase the degree of freedom in design and prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion or the payout portion, a game machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game) The machine 1) includes a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game balls P) and a payout section (eg, payout device 200) capable of dispensing game media. ), and a guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage) that is open on the upper surface and forms a guide passage (e.g., first guide passage or second guide passage) that guides the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion formation portion 202 and second guide passage formation portion 204), and cover portions (for example, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third and a cover body 330), which is provided on the cover portion for restricting the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) falling on the cover portion from falling to the guide passage forming portion. Predetermined restricting portions (e.g., long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 30 and 32), and the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion is provided. A gaming machine is provided with a plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the coin to the payout portion (see FIGS. 19, 20, and 35). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(form)
The game machine of form A1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine according to form A1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) dropped on the cover from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined limiting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 30 and 32).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine according to form A2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion, and a state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to form A2 or A3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 20 and 35).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to form A5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 19)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine according to form A6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined hole that is the largest among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 20)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine according to form A6 or A7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 35).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 27(B)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. See Figure 25)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to form A10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A10 or A11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the attachment frame of the external output board can be used to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from entering the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Figs. 30(C), 31(A), (B), 32 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine according to form A13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retention portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 30(C), 31(A), (B), and 32).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to form A13 or A14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth to which a portion of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 30(C), 31(A), (B), and 32).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (see FIG. 23, Figures 34 and 35)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to form A16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202) can flow down; It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the standing position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 34).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine according to form A16 or A17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) that allows screw members dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to form A18,
The second cover portion (for example, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, flange portion F) (see FIG. 16). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 16)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to form A20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 16).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to form A20 or A21,
Screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, game machine frame 3) are provided for reinforcing the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 16)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A20 to A22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are The screw member is different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A20 to A23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 26 to 28 and 35)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage-forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guide passage-forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 37 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the recessed portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 37(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. FIG. FIG. 11 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 12 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 13 to 15, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 15, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 11 and 12) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the center of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 11), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 17 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 16, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are each composed of a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank forming portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 35) is opened.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 24. FIG. 18, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 19, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 18(A), (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 18(A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 18(A). It is a diagram. 20, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 21, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 22, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 23, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 24, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing a state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear standing wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 19(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 21(A) to 21(C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 26) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 17).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 28) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 17). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball, and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 23A to 23C and 24, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface and mounted from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed therein and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 28) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 17).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See FIG. 24).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 24 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage-forming body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 24A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24(A), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24(B), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 tilts, but the protruding wall portion 341D stands upright across the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 25 with reference to FIG. 25, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 25, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 11) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 25A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 29. FIG. FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 27, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 29 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 30, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 29, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 31, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 29, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. 29. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 29. FIG. FIG. 34 shows (A) the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 35 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 36 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 17, 26 and 27A, screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 26 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 26 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the threaded member N15 loosens and falls upward due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1, it is highly unlikely that it will fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 17, 28 and 29A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 28, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks occurring in 1 and fall off backward, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 moves backward as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 30(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 tilted in a state where two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 30(A)). Therefore, the screw member N3 tilted as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 28, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310, and if it moves backward in a straight line, it will likely fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bends rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 30A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects with the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 30(C), when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the concave grooves 326A to 326C, or A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 in the first passage forming member 203 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 31(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 31(B), when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 32).

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 and 32, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 32, the board mounting frame 211 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 32, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operating portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 11). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 33).

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 and 33, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. 33, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 24, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 34, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower side of the inclination, and moves toward the downstream side ( Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 34(C) and 34(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. is doing.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and being mixed into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) end portions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves leftward, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the areas other than the uncovered area 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, A front-rear dimension L22B is larger than a front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Intrusion into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation holes 220B (see FIG. 14) or the like that are formed can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30C, 31A, 31B, and 32, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 27(B) and 35, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the falling screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 14). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 37B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 24, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 37(B), in the cover portion 360 in which a concave portion 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, the form for implementing the game machine in the characterizing portion 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 38-1 to 38-24.

The gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko gaming machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 38-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 38-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the input signal detection status from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 38-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as display devices, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 38-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 38-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 38-2 and 38-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of vertically extending short sides and a pair of horizontally extending long sides, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 38-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 38-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 38-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 38-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

38-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components provided with a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape, provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 38-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 38-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 38-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

Figure 38-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and Figure 38-6 shows the data bus from the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 38-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 38-5, the horizontally extending wiring patterns forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of horizontally extending wiring patterns. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 38-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 38-5, mounting through through-holes (A to F shown in FIG. 38-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 38-6) are branched, and diagonal wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

FIG. 38-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-8 is formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 38-7 and 38-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 38-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 38-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-7 and 38-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

38-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 38-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 38-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 38-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is accommodated in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 38-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 38-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 38-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 38-10 and 38-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 38-12(A) and (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 38-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion for covering the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is accommodated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 38-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 38-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

38-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 38-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 38-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 38-14 and 38-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 38-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38-15, a solid ground is formed in the portion of the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 38-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 38-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 38-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as detouring the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (terminal of the input circuit, output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns each composed of a straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) is formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage component) is characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, since the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, it bypasses the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

38-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 38-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 38-18 and 38-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of vertically extending short sides and a pair of horizontally extending long sides, and is an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

38-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 38-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 38-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 38-20, the game control board is equipped with connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 38-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 38-21, a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole at position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, among the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus, the input circuit has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38-20 and 38-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 38-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through a through hole at the position Q in the figure from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 38-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for the control of the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, the game control microcomputer Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the input Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

38-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch. Under the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 38-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts with On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38-24(B), the specified through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated, and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 38-24(A), the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, so the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The substrate (game control substrate) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the board so that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 200 Payout device 202 First guide passage formation part 201 Ball tank formation part 203 First passage formation body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Hole Part 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stop member N1-6, 11-16 Screw member 75SG001 Pachinko machine 300 First effect unit 301 Base member 302 Cover member 303 LED board 331 Decoration pattern 400 Second effect unit 401 Base member 402 cover member 403 LED board 420 decoration part 600 third effect unit 800 fourth effect unit 801 base member 802 cover member 803 LED board

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of playing,
an electronic component provided so as to be visible to the player;
a light-transmitting member that is a member having light-transmitting properties and is provided so that the electronic component can be visually recognized;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
with
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part ,
The guide passage-forming portion includes a specific restricting portion that restricts movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage-forming portion to the dispensing portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images